27.03.2013 Views

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

Approved by<br />

Keith Turner<br />

Standards Project Manager<br />

Authorised by<br />

Richard Spoors<br />

C<strong>on</strong>troller, Railway Group Standards<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Synopsis<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> informati<strong>on</strong> to ensure that the<br />

Integrity of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> is<br />

maintained at all times.<br />

This document is the property of<br />

Railtrack PLC. It shall not be<br />

reproduced in whole or in part without<br />

the written permissi<strong>on</strong> of the C<strong>on</strong>troller,<br />

Railway Group Standards,<br />

Railtrack PLC.<br />

Published by<br />

Safety & Standards Directorate,<br />

Railtrack PLC,<br />

Floor DP01, Railtrack House,<br />

Eust<strong>on</strong> Square,<br />

L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> NW1 2EE<br />

© Copyright 1998 Railtrack PLC


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page has been left blank intenti<strong>on</strong>ally


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

C<strong>on</strong>tents<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page 1 of 2<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> Page<br />

Part A<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Issue Record A1<br />

Distribtui<strong>on</strong> A1<br />

Health and Safety Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities A1<br />

Supply A1<br />

Part B<br />

1 Purpose B1<br />

2 Scope B1<br />

3 Glossary of Terms B1<br />

4 Limitati<strong>on</strong>s B5<br />

5 Introducti<strong>on</strong> B6<br />

6 Electrical Behaviour of Railway track B7<br />

7 Operati<strong>on</strong> and Adjustment of the Simple <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B9<br />

8 Train Shunt Imperfecti<strong>on</strong> B10<br />

9 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of “Lightweight” Vehicles B12<br />

10 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Insulati<strong>on</strong>s B13<br />

11 B<strong>on</strong>ding B16<br />

12 Mutual Interference Between <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> B18<br />

13 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of Rail Breaks B19<br />

14 Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> B20<br />

15 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> B21<br />

16 The Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds B24<br />

Part C Schematic Symbols<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> C1<br />

2 Drawing Symbols <strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans C1<br />

3 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding Symbols C8<br />

4 Civil Engineer’s Scale Diagrams C10<br />

Part D Planning and Design<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> D1<br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for B<strong>on</strong>ding Design D1<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Nomenclature D2<br />

4 Choice of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Type D3<br />

5 Cut Secti<strong>on</strong>s D5<br />

6 Operating Times D6<br />

7 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters D8<br />

8 Length of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> D8<br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Gaps and Staggered IRJs D9<br />

10 Selective Operati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> D9<br />

11 Bad Rail Surface D9<br />

12 Emergency Cross–overs D10<br />

13 Insulated Rail Joints and B<strong>on</strong>ding D10<br />

14 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Equipment Positi<strong>on</strong>ing D19<br />

15 Layout and Wiring of Lineside Apparatus Housing D19<br />

16 Duplicate Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s D20<br />

17 Communicati<strong>on</strong>s D21<br />

RAILTRACK 1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page 2 of 2<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> Page<br />

Part E Comp<strong>on</strong>ents and Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> E1<br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for B<strong>on</strong>ding Installati<strong>on</strong> E1<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters E2<br />

4 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Boundaries E3<br />

5 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of Cross <strong>Track</strong> Cables E3<br />

6 Mechanised track Maintenance E6<br />

7 Rail Drilling E6<br />

8 Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s E7<br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box E17<br />

10 Arrangement of <strong>Track</strong> Lead Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(Except Jointless) E19<br />

11 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding E21<br />

12 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding E23<br />

13 High Voltages E24<br />

14 Lineside Apparatus Housing Wiring E24<br />

15 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds E25<br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Installati<strong>on</strong> E30<br />

17 Aluminium Busbars E37<br />

18 Side Leads E46<br />

19 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Negative Return Jumpers E52<br />

Part F Instrumentati<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> and Use<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> F1<br />

2 Multi–meters F1<br />

3 The Universal Shunt Box F1<br />

4 Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester F2<br />

5 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector F4<br />

6 Mark 4 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter F5<br />

Part G Testing and Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

2 High Voltages G1<br />

3 Lineside Apparatus Housing Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

4 B<strong>on</strong>ding Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

5 IRJ Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G2<br />

6 Performance Test G2<br />

Part H Maintenance<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> H1<br />

2 Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong> H1<br />

3 Drop Shunt Test H1<br />

4 Full Test H2<br />

Part J Fault Finding<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> J1<br />

2 Categories of Failure J1<br />

3 Intermittent Failures J1<br />

4 Right Side Failures J2<br />

5 Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side Failures J4<br />

References Ref 1<br />

2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Issue Record<br />

Distributi<strong>on</strong><br />

Health and Safety<br />

Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities<br />

Supply<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part A<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page A1 of 1<br />

This Approved Code of Practice will be updated when necessary by distributi<strong>on</strong><br />

of a replacement Part A and such other parts as are amended.<br />

Amended or additi<strong>on</strong>al parts of revised pages will be marked by a vertical black<br />

line in the adjacent margin.<br />

Part Issue Date Comments<br />

Part A One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part B One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part C One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part D One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part E One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part F One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part G One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part H One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part I not used.<br />

Part J One August 1994 Original document.<br />

References One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part A Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part B Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part C Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part D Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part E Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part F Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part G Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part H Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part I not used.<br />

Part J Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

References Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trolled copies of this Approved Code of Practice should be made available<br />

to all pers<strong>on</strong>nel who are resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design, installati<strong>on</strong>, testing,<br />

maintenance and faulting of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong>.<br />

In issuing this Approved Code of Practice, Railtrack PLC makes no warranties,<br />

express or implied, that compliance with all or any Railway Group Standards or<br />

Codes of Practice is sufficient <strong>on</strong> its own to ensure safe systems of work or<br />

operati<strong>on</strong>. Each user is reminded of its own resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities to ensure health<br />

and safety at work and its individual duties under health and safety legislati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trolled and unc<strong>on</strong>trolled copies of this Approved Code of Practice may be<br />

obtained from the Industry Safety Liais<strong>on</strong> Dept, Safety and Standards<br />

Directorate, Railtrack PLC, Railtrack House DP01, Eust<strong>on</strong> Square, L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>,<br />

NW1 2EE.<br />

RAILTRACK A1


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page has been left blank intenti<strong>on</strong>ally


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Purpose<br />

2 Scope<br />

3 Glossary of Terms<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part B<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B1 of 25<br />

This Approved Code of Practice gives details of best practice in respect of track<br />

circuits in general, in order to achieve the requirements of GK/RT 0251.<br />

The c<strong>on</strong>tents of this Approved Code of Practice apply to all track circuits.<br />

The definiti<strong>on</strong>s of terms used by Signal Engineers vary depending <strong>on</strong> the<br />

locati<strong>on</strong> in which they were trained. The following terms will be used as standard<br />

throughout this handbook.<br />

Bearer<br />

An item of steel or c<strong>on</strong>crete of n<strong>on</strong>–standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s used to support the<br />

track in S & C areas (see Sleeper and Timber).<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> from <strong>on</strong>e rail or part of a track circuit to any other rail or<br />

part of the track circuit.<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d cross c<strong>on</strong>necting the tracti<strong>on</strong> rails of parallel tracks to form a<br />

mesh of alternate paths for tracti<strong>on</strong> return current.<br />

Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Provided to ensure electrical c<strong>on</strong>tinuity between two rails mechanically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nected by a steel fishplate.<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Special device which presents a low impedance to tracti<strong>on</strong> current and a higher<br />

impedance to track circuit current.<br />

Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

If any secti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit is b<strong>on</strong>ded in parallel to other secti<strong>on</strong>s of that track<br />

circuit, a disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not cause the track circuit to indicate the presence of<br />

a train. The actual presence of a train within that secti<strong>on</strong> may not be indicated<br />

under certain failure c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. This method of b<strong>on</strong>ding is defined as Parallel<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding and is the n<strong>on</strong>–preferred method of b<strong>on</strong>ding. Where it cannot be<br />

avoided, special precauti<strong>on</strong>s must be taken (see individual Secti<strong>on</strong>s).<br />

Red B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d that has been designated by the Electrificati<strong>on</strong> Engineer as being<br />

dangerous to staff if disc<strong>on</strong>nected. It is coloured red for identificati<strong>on</strong>. The<br />

Electric C<strong>on</strong>trol Room shall be advised whenever a disc<strong>on</strong>nected red b<strong>on</strong>d is<br />

observed.<br />

Series B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Series b<strong>on</strong>ding is where the track is b<strong>on</strong>ded together in series, so that if any<br />

short circuit or disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> occurs, the track circuit will indicate the apparent<br />

presence of a train. It is the preferred method of b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Structure B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A b<strong>on</strong>d that c<strong>on</strong>nects adjacent lineside metal structures to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail<br />

system to ensure staff safety through equi–potential z<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A cable specifically provided for c<strong>on</strong>tinuity of tracti<strong>on</strong> current return, although it<br />

may additi<strong>on</strong>ally carry track circuit current.<br />

RAILTRACK B1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B2 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The b<strong>on</strong>ding required to carry the tracti<strong>on</strong> return current <strong>on</strong> both a.c. and d.c.<br />

electrified lines. Tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding is generally parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Transpositi<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A jumper cable where track circuit polarities and/or tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails are<br />

switched across a pair of IRJs.<br />

Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A jumper cable that has been designated by the Signal Engineer to be an<br />

important part of the diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding of comm<strong>on</strong>/single rail track circuit. It is<br />

coloured yellow or identified by yellow tape. Damage must be reported and<br />

repairs carried out as a matter of priority.<br />

Clearance Point<br />

The minimum distance from switches and crossings at which track circuits<br />

having the functi<strong>on</strong> of proving clearance may be terminated to ensure a passing<br />

clearance of at least 457mm between vehicles in all circumstances.<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail (CR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail (the signal rail) is used with IRJs<br />

to separate the track circuits. The other rail (the comm<strong>on</strong> rail) is electrically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous but is not used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes.<br />

Cut Secti<strong>on</strong><br />

A method of reducing the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous length of a track circuit by the use of<br />

individual track circuits, each <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trolling the same final TPR. These are<br />

indicated as <strong>on</strong>e track circuit <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s panel.<br />

Double Rail (DR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where both rails are fitted with IRJs, or tuned z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

are used to completely isolate a track circuit.<br />

Drop–away Time<br />

The time between the applicati<strong>on</strong> of a shunt to the rails and the fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts of<br />

track relay (TR) fully opening (see also Pick–up Time).<br />

Drop Shunt<br />

The maximum value of n<strong>on</strong>–inductive resistance which, when placed across the<br />

rails, will cause the track relay to fully open its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts.<br />

Fishplate<br />

Metal plates for joining rails together.<br />

Frequency Rotati<strong>on</strong><br />

The sequential applicati<strong>on</strong> of specified frequencies.<br />

Insulated Rail Joint (IRJ)<br />

A method of joining rails together whilst maintaining electrical insulati<strong>on</strong> between<br />

them.<br />

Jointed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits whose extremities are defined by the use of Insulated Rail Joints<br />

(IRJs).<br />

Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits whose extremities are defined by the use of tuned circuit<br />

techniques. The extreme limits of a jointless track circuit area are either defined<br />

by the use of IRJs or by the use of a tuned circuit between the rails.<br />

B2 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B3 of 25<br />

Joint Hopping<br />

Where fast moving short vehicles pass from <strong>on</strong>e track circuit to the next, the<br />

difference between the pick–up and drop–away times can cause the vehicle to<br />

momentarily disappear.<br />

Jumper Cable<br />

Used to electrically c<strong>on</strong>nect, for track circuit or tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes, two pieces of<br />

rail that are not adjacent.<br />

Overlay <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

A track circuit which can be superimposed over another, neither having any<br />

effect <strong>on</strong> the other and both operating independently.<br />

Pick–up Shunt<br />

The minimum value of resistance between the two running rails at which the<br />

track relay will just close its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts.<br />

Pick–up Time<br />

The time between the removal of a shunt from the rails and the fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts of<br />

the track relay making (see also Drop–away Time).<br />

Plans<br />

For the definiti<strong>on</strong> of all types of Plans, see SDH E11.<br />

Selective Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

Operati<strong>on</strong> of a porti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by selecti<strong>on</strong> of the positi<strong>on</strong> of a set of<br />

points. Selective operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits is no l<strong>on</strong>ger permitted.<br />

Single Rail (SR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail (the signal rail) is used with IRJs<br />

to separate the track circuits. The other rail (the comm<strong>on</strong> rail) is electrically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous and is used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes.<br />

Sleeper<br />

An item of wood, steel or c<strong>on</strong>crete of standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, used to support and<br />

gauge the track (see Bearer and Timber).<br />

Spur<br />

A secti<strong>on</strong> of running rail required to be electrically comm<strong>on</strong> to a series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

rail, but which is not itself in series.<br />

Stagger (Electrical)<br />

The phase or polarity difference between <strong>on</strong>e track circuit and the next, or<br />

between the rails <strong>on</strong> either side of an IRJ within <strong>on</strong>e track circuit.<br />

Stagger (Physical)<br />

Occurs where two IRJs in a pair of rails are not exactly opposite each other,<br />

thus creating a dead secti<strong>on</strong> between track circuits or within a track circuit.<br />

Switches & Crossings (S & C)<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong>s of track other than plain line.<br />

Tail Cable<br />

This is a cable which c<strong>on</strong>nects the lineside apparatus housing to the trackside<br />

equipment, but not direct to the running rails (see <strong>Track</strong> Cable).<br />

Timber<br />

An item of wood of n<strong>on</strong>–standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, used to support the track in S & C<br />

areas (see Bearer and Sleeper).<br />

RAILTRACK B3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B4 of 25<br />

4 Limitati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> Cable<br />

This is a cable which c<strong>on</strong>nects the track disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> links/fuses or trackside<br />

equipment to the rails.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Jumping<br />

Occurs when a fast moving vehicle passes over a very short track circuit (or a<br />

short arm of a l<strong>on</strong>ger track circuit) and fails to de–energise the track relay.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter<br />

A device that detects the passage of a vehicle by causing a permanent<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> within the track circuit until the device has been replaced.<br />

Transpositi<strong>on</strong> Joint<br />

An IRJ where transpositi<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds are used to transpose the tracti<strong>on</strong> and/or<br />

track circuit rails.<br />

Catch or Trap Point<br />

A switch (ie. blades and tiebar <strong>on</strong>ly), inserted in sidings etc., to divert runaway<br />

rolling stock away from the main line, or <strong>on</strong> gradients to de–rail runaway wag<strong>on</strong>s<br />

etc.<br />

Crossing<br />

The inter secti<strong>on</strong> of two tracks <strong>on</strong> the level. Often known as a diam<strong>on</strong>d crossing<br />

due to the shape produced by the intersecting tracks. Not to be c<strong>on</strong>fused with<br />

the crossover.<br />

Switch Toes<br />

Figure B1<br />

Switch Rails<br />

Heel Of Switch Rail<br />

Stock Rails<br />

Closure Rails<br />

Rail Joint<br />

Wing Rails<br />

Crossing Nose<br />

Closure Panels<br />

Crossing Angle<br />

Check Rail<br />

Crossing Back<br />

Switch and Crossing Terms<br />

Crossover<br />

A crossover c<strong>on</strong>sists of two points arranged to link parallel tracks. They are<br />

known as facing or trailing, depending <strong>on</strong> whether a train proceeding in its<br />

correct directi<strong>on</strong> al<strong>on</strong>g the line can run directly over the facing crossover, or<br />

must reverse to cross the trailing crossover.<br />

Double Juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

The point of juncti<strong>on</strong> of two double track routes. It comprises two turnouts and a<br />

crossing.<br />

Ladder Juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

A form of juncti<strong>on</strong> eliminating the crossing.<br />

Where job titles are used within this Approved Code of Practice to reflect the<br />

anticipated functi<strong>on</strong>al splits of resp<strong>on</strong>sibility relevant to technical competence,<br />

they should not be interpreted as actual job titles. The specific split of<br />

B4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B5 of 25<br />

resp<strong>on</strong>sibility will be governed by a c<strong>on</strong>tractual framework, to which reference<br />

should be made.<br />

Catalogue Numbers shown within this document are not directly c<strong>on</strong>trolled by<br />

Railtrack and as such, will not be maintained and kept up to date. Although<br />

every effort has been made to ensure that these were correct at the time of<br />

publicati<strong>on</strong>, it is therefore recommended that your supplier is c<strong>on</strong>tacted and a<br />

check is made with regard to the accuracy of these catalogue numbers prior to<br />

use.<br />

Where references are made to other documents, a comprehensive list of these<br />

will be c<strong>on</strong>tained within the “Ref” secti<strong>on</strong> of this document. The informati<strong>on</strong><br />

appertaining to these references was correct as of Issue 13 of the Railtrack<br />

Catalogue of Railway Group Standards.<br />

5.1 The Purpose of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The track circuit is a device designed to c<strong>on</strong>tinuously prove the absence of a<br />

train from a given secti<strong>on</strong> of track; it cannot absolutely prove the presence of a<br />

train, since its designed failure mode is to give the same indicati<strong>on</strong> as if a train is<br />

present.<br />

By proving the absence of a train, a clear track circuit can be used to c<strong>on</strong>firm<br />

that it is safe to set a route and permit a train to proceed.<br />

5.2 Fundamental Design Principle<br />

A secti<strong>on</strong> of railway track is electrically defined by the provisi<strong>on</strong> of insulated rail<br />

joints (IRJs), or equivalent, in the rails at either end as shown in Figure B2. A<br />

source of electrical energy is c<strong>on</strong>nected, via a series impedance, across the rails<br />

at <strong>on</strong>e end and a detector, which is receptive to the particular form of electrical<br />

energy, is c<strong>on</strong>nected across the rails at the other end.<br />

Figure B2<br />

Transmitter<br />

(Feed)<br />

Detector<br />

(Relay)<br />

Insulated<br />

Rail Joints<br />

With no train within its boundaries, the detector senses the transmitted electrical<br />

energy and energises the repeater circuit. This c<strong>on</strong>veys the absence of a train to<br />

the signalling system (ie. track circuit clear).<br />

A train within the track circuit will cause the rails to be short circuited such that<br />

the detector no l<strong>on</strong>ger sees sufficient electrical energy; it therefore changes<br />

state and informs the signalling system (ie. track circuit occupied).<br />

It can be seen that an electrical short circuit between the rails, caused other than<br />

by a train, or any disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> within the circuit, will fail the track circuit and<br />

inform the signalling system that the track circuit is occupied. Such a circuit<br />

c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong> incorporates a high degree of “fail safe”; it does, however, depend<br />

up<strong>on</strong> good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact between the wheel sets of the train and the rails<br />

RAILTRACK B5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B6 of 25<br />

6 Electrical Behaviour<br />

of Railway <strong>Track</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

up<strong>on</strong> which they run. It also depends up<strong>on</strong> a c<strong>on</strong>tinuous low impedance path<br />

between the steel tyres of each wheel via the c<strong>on</strong>necting axle.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits apply this basic principle in a variety of ways for various reas<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

The source of electrical energy may be d.c., a.c. at power frequencies, a.c. at<br />

audio frequencies, or a series of impulses. The detector may be a simple relay,<br />

a more complex a.c. vane relay or a receiver tuned to a particular frequency or<br />

pattern of signals. Additi<strong>on</strong>al items may have to be added to overcome the<br />

problems arising from sharing the rails with heavy currents created by an electric<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> system.<br />

6.1 Ballast Resistance<br />

Ballast resistance is the resistance between the two rails of a track circuit and<br />

comprises of leakage between the rail fixings, sleepers and earth. The value of<br />

this resistance is dependent up<strong>on</strong> the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> of any insulati<strong>on</strong>s, cleanliness of<br />

the ballast and the prevailing weather c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. The ballast resistance is<br />

inversely proporti<strong>on</strong>al to track circuit length and is expressed as ohm kilometres,<br />

typical values being in the range 2 to 10Ωkm. Lower values may be obtained in<br />

wet c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s with bad drainage and/or c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong> with c<strong>on</strong>ductive materials.<br />

Higher values may be obtained in dry/clean c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s or during frosty weather.<br />

A reliable track circuit must therefore be able to operate over a wide variati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

ballast resistance.<br />

Most simple explanati<strong>on</strong>s of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong> portray ballast resistance as a<br />

single resistance c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails as shown in Figure B3. Whilst<br />

such a representati<strong>on</strong> is useful in explaining the simple behaviour of d.c. track<br />

circuits, it is important to understand that the model’s limitati<strong>on</strong>s make it<br />

unsuitable to explain many of the more complex phenomena dem<strong>on</strong>strated by<br />

track circuits. For the types of track circuit used, the reactance of the ballast<br />

can be c<strong>on</strong>sidered as negligible.<br />

Figure B3<br />

B6 RAILTRACK<br />

Rail<br />

Rail<br />

Ballast<br />

Resistance<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering other than the simple case, a more accurate model would<br />

represent the ballast resistance as a series of resistances between each rail and<br />

earth as shown in Figure B4. Although there is a further comp<strong>on</strong>ent of<br />

resistance between the rails independent of earth, it is high compared to the rail–<br />

earth resistance and can be discounted for most calculati<strong>on</strong>s.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure B4<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B7 of 25<br />

RAILTRACK B7<br />

Rail<br />

Rail<br />

Earth<br />

6.2 Rail Impedance<br />

The d.c. resistance of rail is very low, around 0.035Ω/km, although this is<br />

increased to approximately 0.25Ω/km by the relatively higher resistance of<br />

galvanised ir<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds in jointed track. The inductance of rail can raise the<br />

overall impedance per rail from approximately 0.3Ω/km (50Hz) to, in the case of<br />

reed track circuits, 2.5Ω/km (400Hz) and for TI21 track circuits, 10Ω/km (2kHz).<br />

These impedance values may be increased further by large tracti<strong>on</strong> currents,<br />

due to the rail being driven toward saturati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering a.c. track circuits, rail inductance must be taken into account<br />

by applicati<strong>on</strong> of the further complex model including rail inductance as shown in<br />

Figure B5. Although of little c<strong>on</strong>sequence at power frequencies, audio frequency<br />

track circuits exhibit a steep decline in rail voltage as distance from the<br />

transmitter increases. Since the ballast resistance is now distributed throughout<br />

the length, detailed calculati<strong>on</strong> requires the use of hyperbolic functi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

These effects can usually be ignored when c<strong>on</strong>sidering the operati<strong>on</strong> of a.c.<br />

power frequency track circuits, where rail voltage can be expected to decline<br />

very little between the feed and relay ends.<br />

Figure B5<br />

Rail<br />

Earth<br />

6.3 Rail to Rail Capacitance<br />

Although an even more complete picture would include rail–to–rail capacitance,<br />

this is very small and of marginal significance relative to track circuit operati<strong>on</strong> at<br />

audio frequencies.<br />

6.4 Workable Lengths of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

It can be seen that the workable length of a track circuit is limited by three<br />

factors:<br />

• the declining value of ballast resistance;<br />

• the increasing value of rail impedance;<br />

Rail


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B8 of 25<br />

7 Operati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

Adjustment of the<br />

Simple <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

• Immunisati<strong>on</strong> / Electrificati<strong>on</strong> requirements, including electromagnetic<br />

compatibility with trains.<br />

As the various types of track circuit feed/transmitter produce differing power<br />

outputs, and as rail impedance is frequency related, it follows that the maximum<br />

workable length will vary with design type and with the minimum ballast<br />

resistance at which the track circuit is expected to remain functi<strong>on</strong>al.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider the simple d.c. track circuit depicted in Figure B6.<br />

Feed<br />

Resistance<br />

Figure B6<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Train<br />

Shunt<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

B8 RAILTRACK<br />

Rail<br />

Ballast<br />

Resistance<br />

7.1 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Clear<br />

The ballast resistance forms an additi<strong>on</strong>al load in parallel with the relay. As the<br />

ballast resistance falls due to wet weather, the current drawn from the feed<br />

increases. This will cause the voltage across the feed resistor to increase, so<br />

reducing the rail and relay voltages. If this reducti<strong>on</strong> causes the relay voltage to<br />

fall below the relay pick–up value, the track circuit will not clear after an<br />

occupying train has departed. A further reducti<strong>on</strong> of the relay voltage to below<br />

relay drop–away value will fail the track to the occupied state without the<br />

passage of a train.<br />

Reducing the value of feed resistance has the effect of increasing the current<br />

fed into the rails and raising the rail/relay voltage.<br />

L<strong>on</strong>g feed end leads insert additi<strong>on</strong>al n<strong>on</strong>–adjustable feed resistance and<br />

thereby reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable feed resistance. L<strong>on</strong>g relay<br />

end leads reduce the ratio of relay voltage to rail voltage by potential divider<br />

acti<strong>on</strong>; the effect is to cause the track circuit to indicate occupied at a higher<br />

ballast resistance. It therefore imposes a shorter maximum workable length.<br />

7.2 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Occupied<br />

When the track circuit is occupied by a train, a short circuit current will flow from<br />

the feed end equipment, which is limited by the value of the feed resistance and<br />

the characteristics of the feed end equipment itself. The feed end equipment is<br />

designed to cope with this worst case power dissipati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The train shunt resistance is in parallel with the ballast resistance. With any<br />

given value of feed resistance, the relay will operate at particular values of<br />

combined ballast/train shunt resistance. Thus, higher ballast resistance will<br />

require a lower value of train shunt resistance to operate the relay and vice<br />

versa.<br />

Rail<br />

TR


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8 Train Shunt<br />

Imperfecti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B9 of 25<br />

The minimum permitted drop shunt resistance is 0.5Ω (0.3Ω <strong>on</strong> certain<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d track circuits). During very dry weather or severe frost<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, the ballast resistance increases towards its natural maximum and will<br />

offer <strong>on</strong>ly a small c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> towards the overall shunt. Thus, when a 0.5Ω<br />

(0.3Ω) shunt is placed across the rails, it must still reduce the relay voltage to<br />

below drop–away value.<br />

It should also be noted that the track relay is dropped by short circuit rather than<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. Therefore, the drop–away time of the relay is increased due to<br />

the inductive circuit prol<strong>on</strong>ging the decay of the coil current.<br />

7.3 Principles of Basic Adjustment<br />

The difficulty with adjusting track circuits (where such adjustment is provided) is<br />

knowing the prevailing value of ballast resistance. Details entered <strong>on</strong> the track<br />

circuit record card provide a useful history. These vary with track circuit type<br />

and the appropriate Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook should<br />

be c<strong>on</strong>sulted.<br />

Assuming average c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, the feed resistance is adjusted to obtain a relay<br />

voltage in the range 25% to 75% above the pick–up value whilst maintaining the<br />

drop shunt resistance at a value greater than the minimum required. If the track<br />

circuit fails due to wet weather, it may be possible to remedy the situati<strong>on</strong> by<br />

reducing the feed resistance. It is important that the track circuit is re–tested<br />

after it has dried out.<br />

The energy seen by the relay with a train <strong>on</strong> the track circuit will depend up<strong>on</strong><br />

the resistive value of the train shunt (see Figure B6). This energy will be zero<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly when the train shunt is zero. Whilst the ohmic resistance of an axle and<br />

wheels is virtually zero, there are a number of factors that can make the<br />

effective train shunt much higher. Since some factors are track based, whilst<br />

others are vehicle specific, the precise mixture of factors applying to a particular<br />

vehicle at a particular place can be very variable.<br />

8.1 Rust Films<br />

Light rust film <strong>on</strong> the rail head and/or tyre tends to act as a semi–c<strong>on</strong>ductor, in<br />

that it exhibits high resistance until the voltage exceeds a particular threshold<br />

value when it breaks down completely. The breakdown voltage rises in<br />

sympathy with the extent of the c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong>; very heavy rust films, resulting<br />

from prol<strong>on</strong>ged disuse, render many track circuit designs incapable of detecting<br />

vehicles. Figure B7 gives an approximate characteristic of such films.<br />

Current<br />

0.01V<br />

Figure B7<br />

RAILTRACK B9<br />

Very<br />

Good<br />

Damp<br />

Light Rust<br />

Dry<br />

Light Rust<br />

Heavy Rust<br />

Or<br />

Leaf Residue<br />

Good Poor Bad<br />

0.05V 0.1V 0.3V 0.6V - 200V<br />

Voltage


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B10 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The mechanical strength of light rust films is much reduced by the presence of<br />

moisture when the c<strong>on</strong>taminant tends to be squeezed out from the wheel–rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact patch and doesn’t cause any shunting problems. Therefore, lightly<br />

rusted rails will <strong>on</strong>ly be a problem when dry. This problem is most severe when<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s are:<br />

• showery weather accompanied by drying wind; or<br />

• prol<strong>on</strong>ged periods without trains.<br />

Special precauti<strong>on</strong>s need to be taken after relaying operati<strong>on</strong>s, when track<br />

circuits must not be restored to full operati<strong>on</strong> until a reas<strong>on</strong>able surface has<br />

been created.<br />

8.2 Leaf Residue<br />

This problem is c<strong>on</strong>fined to particular areas where the extent of lineside<br />

afforestati<strong>on</strong> is significant. It is also limited to autumn when trees are shedding<br />

their leaves. Leaves are drawn into the wheel–rail interface by the passage of a<br />

train, where they are squashed into a pulp which c<strong>on</strong>taminates both rail and tyre.<br />

The severity of this problem in particular years is c<strong>on</strong>nected to the general<br />

weather situati<strong>on</strong>. In simple terms, reas<strong>on</strong>ably dry weather with little wind will<br />

cause the leaves to fall gradually over a l<strong>on</strong>g time period and to be reas<strong>on</strong>ably<br />

sap free when they do fall. C<strong>on</strong>versely, gale c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s will lead to a sudden<br />

massive fall of sap laden leaves. It is the latter situati<strong>on</strong> which gives rise to the<br />

worst c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

In terms of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>, the electrical characteristics of severe leaf<br />

residue are similar to very heavy rust. Fortunately, the sites suffering such<br />

problems are generally known and special arrangements can be made.<br />

8.3 Coal Dust and Sand<br />

Problems with coal dust <strong>on</strong> the rail head tend to be c<strong>on</strong>fined to colliery areas,<br />

where coal deposited <strong>on</strong> the wag<strong>on</strong> chassis after loading/unloading is<br />

subsequently shaken off. Sand c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong> is usually associated with slow<br />

moving locomotives using their sanders excessively.<br />

In each case, the effect is similar to heavy rust films.<br />

8.4 Compositi<strong>on</strong> Tread Brake Blocks<br />

Certain types of rolling stock are fitted with a composite type of tread brake block<br />

instead of the traditi<strong>on</strong>al cast ir<strong>on</strong> variety, the intenti<strong>on</strong> being to improve brake<br />

performance. This is found to deposit a c<strong>on</strong>taminant film <strong>on</strong> the steel tyre, which<br />

tends to insulate the train from the rails.<br />

8.5 Tread and Disc Brakes<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering the electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact between two pieces of metal separated<br />

by a thin film of insulati<strong>on</strong>, it can be appreciated that surface roughness of the<br />

metal can permit high spots to penetrate the film. Where this occurs, the<br />

insulati<strong>on</strong> will be ineffective.<br />

Tread brakes cause the tyres to be roughened at each brake applicati<strong>on</strong>,<br />

whereas disc brakes allow the tyres to be rolled into a very smooth surface<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. This can be observed visually as tread braked tyres have a matt<br />

appearance, whilst disc braked tyres show a mirror–like quality.<br />

Therefore, tread braked vehicles provide a better train shunt than disc braked<br />

vehicles.<br />

8.6 Axle Weight and Suspensi<strong>on</strong> Design<br />

The pressure applied to any c<strong>on</strong>taminant film is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the downward<br />

force of the wheel <strong>on</strong> the rail and this is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to vehicle axle weight.<br />

B10 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

“Lightweight”<br />

Vehicles<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B11 of 25<br />

In practice, wheels do not roll smoothly and fricti<strong>on</strong> free. There is a guidance<br />

force c<strong>on</strong>tinually pulling the wheelset into the correct trajectory and this guidance<br />

force is associated with microscopic slippage between wheel and rail. Advances<br />

in bogie design have tended to reduce this guidance force and slippage, giving a<br />

smoother ride for the passenger as well as reducing the wear rate of both rail<br />

and tyre.<br />

Unfortunately, these qualities reduce the ability of the tyres to penetrate any film,<br />

as well as reducing their ability to clean the rail by abrasi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

8.7 <strong>Track</strong> Geometry<br />

Vehicle guidance force and wheel rail slippage are increased in curved track.<br />

Therefore, train shunt will be improved when the vehicles are travelling <strong>on</strong><br />

curved track.<br />

If all rails and tyres were clean and wheel–rail c<strong>on</strong>tact was perfect, any type of<br />

vehicle would satisfactorily operate any type of track circuit. However,<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>dary lines in particular have suffered a fall in traffic leading to regular<br />

formati<strong>on</strong> of light rust films. At the same time, the vehicles using such lines have<br />

been increasingly of the modern DMU variety, which magnify the train shunt<br />

difficulties because of their suspensi<strong>on</strong> design, brake type, weight (which,<br />

although still heavy, is relatively light) and small number of vehicles in a train.<br />

When a vehicle is static <strong>on</strong> a light rust film, the track circuit voltage will usually<br />

break it down and the track circuit will occupy. This is because the track clear<br />

rail voltage is higher than the film breakdown voltage. However, when that<br />

vehicle is moving, the wheels are c<strong>on</strong>tinually rolling <strong>on</strong>to new film which requires<br />

to be repeatedly broken down. C<strong>on</strong>sider the following sequence of events:<br />

When a wheel first enters the track circuit, the track clear rail voltage is<br />

presented across the film. The film breaks down resulting in the rail voltage<br />

collapsing towards zero.<br />

As the wheel moves <strong>on</strong> to new surface, there is insufficient voltage available to<br />

break through the new film. The train shunt is removed and the rail voltage rises<br />

towards the clear value.<br />

When the rail voltage attains the breakdown level, the film is punctured, the train<br />

shunt re–applies and the rail voltage <strong>on</strong>ce again plummets toward zero.<br />

The result is a high frequency noise voltage across the rails which can be<br />

observed with a suitably sensitive instrument.<br />

Where the threshold breakdown voltage is less than the rail voltage at which the<br />

relay drops away, the noise will not result in track circuit malfuncti<strong>on</strong>. This<br />

parameter is used to assess the performance of various track circuit types<br />

relative to their ability to detect lightweight vehicles.<br />

To assist vehicles to shunt track circuits, a device known as the “<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Assister” has been fitted to modern diesel multiple units.<br />

RAILTRACK B11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B12 of 25<br />

10 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10.1 Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Insulated rail joints (IRJs) are required to join rails together mechanically but not<br />

electrically. The Permanent Way Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the installati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

maintenance of all IRJs.<br />

10.2 Point Equipment<br />

Apart from the IRJs, used to electrically separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail, the reliable<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits requires the provisi<strong>on</strong> of other insulati<strong>on</strong>s in particular<br />

circumstances.<br />

Any direct metallic c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between the two rails will be interpreted as a train<br />

and will cause the track circuit to fail occupied. At a set of points, there are<br />

many of these c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, which therefore need to be fitted with insulati<strong>on</strong>s, as<br />

shown in Figure B8, which is a typical example; there are, however, some<br />

regi<strong>on</strong>al variati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

B12 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

C<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B13 of 25<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

B<br />

A Soleplate<br />

The soleplate is formed from two metal plates secured together by a bolted c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> at an intermediate<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> between the rails, which includes insulated ferrules, washers and plates to maintain electrical<br />

separati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Where the soleplate is extended to <strong>on</strong>e side, as required for point machine operati<strong>on</strong>, a sec<strong>on</strong>d insulated<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is provided between the point machine and the nearest rail.<br />

B Permanent Way Stretcher Bars<br />

These c<strong>on</strong>nect the two point switches together and are formed from two separate pieces c<strong>on</strong>nected<br />

together with two bolts. The bolted c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> includes insulati<strong>on</strong> ferrules, washers and plates to<br />

maintain electrical separati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

C FPL Stretcher Bar<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> ferrules, washers and plates are fitted where the stretcher bar is c<strong>on</strong>nected to <strong>on</strong>e of the point<br />

switch blades; usually that furthest from the drive mechanism. The design is such that the insulati<strong>on</strong> can<br />

be fitted at either end of the stretcher bar, but should not be fitted at both ends.<br />

D Point Drive Rod<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> is provided either separately, or is incorporated into the drive rod jaw c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>to the point<br />

machine.<br />

E Lock & Detector Rods<br />

Insulated bushes are fitted where the screwed end c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are attached to the switch extensi<strong>on</strong><br />

pieces.<br />

Figure B8<br />

RAILTRACK B13<br />

D<br />

E<br />

A


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B14 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10.3 C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Early forms of c<strong>on</strong>crete sleeper were fitted with chairs for bullhead rail in similar<br />

fashi<strong>on</strong> to those fitted to timber sleepers. The chair was usually secured to the<br />

sleeper with a through bolt from the underside. These did not present any<br />

widespread problem since track circuits were not comm<strong>on</strong> in the rural areas,<br />

where c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers were seen to be advantageous.<br />

Although short track circuits can be made to work over such sleepers, the ballast<br />

resistance is usually quite low and subject to more severe weather related<br />

swings. It is also now known that damp c<strong>on</strong>crete behaves as an electrochemical<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>dary cell which can give rise to residual voltage problems with d.c. track<br />

circuits.<br />

Modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers incorporate a rubber pad under the rail foot and<br />

moulded insulati<strong>on</strong>s where the fixings bear <strong>on</strong> the top of the foot, as shown in<br />

Figure B9. The effect is to increase ballast resistance to levels significantly<br />

higher than those obtained with timber sleepers. However, the insulati<strong>on</strong>s do<br />

erode due to the vibrati<strong>on</strong> of passing traffic and, c<strong>on</strong>sequently require periodical<br />

replacement. Lack of attenti<strong>on</strong> to insulati<strong>on</strong> usually results in gradual<br />

degradati<strong>on</strong> of the ballast resistance rather than sudden failure.<br />

Centre Leg<br />

Figure B9<br />

Fr<strong>on</strong>t Arch<br />

Heelseat<br />

Rear Arch<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Rail Pad<br />

Rail Foot<br />

10.4 Steel Sleepers<br />

Steel sleepers are equipped with insulati<strong>on</strong>s similar to modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers<br />

and, provided they are subject to an effective preventative maintenance<br />

programme, track circuits will operate satisfactorily.<br />

However, as the sleeper is in more intimate electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with general earth,<br />

much higher levels of track circuit unreliability will result from poor insulati<strong>on</strong> than<br />

is the case with modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers.<br />

B14 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B15 of 25<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding describes the means by which the individual comp<strong>on</strong>ents of the railway<br />

track are c<strong>on</strong>nected together electrically for track circuit purposes. The term<br />

also includes the additi<strong>on</strong>al electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s necessary for the proper<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> of electric tracti<strong>on</strong>. Symbols used <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans are shown in Part<br />

C and various terms are explained in Secti<strong>on</strong> 3. Refer also to GK/RT0252.<br />

11.1 Series and Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

In order for a track circuit to fail safe (to show occupied) in the event of a<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>, it is necessary to b<strong>on</strong>d all elements of the track circuit in<br />

series. However, in S & C areas, it may not be physically possible to arrange<br />

total series b<strong>on</strong>ding of both rails. Examples of series and parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding are<br />

shown in Figure B10.<br />

Provided that a spur is very short, it is permissible to b<strong>on</strong>d it in parallel without<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>al safeguard. However, where the spur is l<strong>on</strong>g, or in other cases where<br />

necessary, parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding may be resorted to provided that steps are taken to<br />

ensure that vehicles are not lost due to disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of part of the parallel<br />

system. This is achieved by creating a mesh of alternative diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

paths between parallel elements, and clearly identifying the associated b<strong>on</strong>ds by<br />

their yellow colour. It is necessary to ensure that such yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

repaired quickly before other b<strong>on</strong>ds in the mesh have time to fail in a manner<br />

likely to cause an unsafe failure.<br />

Because of the additi<strong>on</strong>al complicati<strong>on</strong> of significant rail impedance with parallel<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding, audio frequency track circuits are generally unsuitable in all but the<br />

simplest of pointwork.<br />

Figure B10<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay<br />

Preferred Series B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Feed<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay <strong>Track</strong> Feed<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-preffered Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

RAILTRACK B15


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B16 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11.2 Double and Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Double rail track circuit arrangements have both rails fitted with IRJs to<br />

completely isolate a track circuit. Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are used when a tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

current return path is required. IRJs and impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are not required with<br />

Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong>.<br />

Single rail track circuit arrangements have <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail fitted with IRJs to<br />

separate the track circuits. The other rail is electrically c<strong>on</strong>tinuous. If this<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous rail is used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes, the b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement is<br />

called Single Rail B<strong>on</strong>ding. If this c<strong>on</strong>tinuous rail is not used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

purposes, the b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement is called Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Whilst some designs of track circuit can be used in either single or double rail<br />

mode, others are limited to double rail applicati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

In some S & C areas and certain electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, it is necessary for <strong>on</strong>e<br />

or more adjacent track circuit to share <strong>on</strong>e comm<strong>on</strong> rail. This arrangement can<br />

lead to unsafe failure modes unless special steps are taken to ensure that<br />

elements of the comm<strong>on</strong> rail cannot become isolated from the remainder. This is<br />

achieved by creating a mesh of alternative diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding paths and marking<br />

the associated b<strong>on</strong>ds yellow as for the previous parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding case.<br />

11.3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupters are used at trap or run–back catch points <strong>on</strong> lines<br />

which are track circuited. The device is designed to interrupt the track circuit in<br />

the event of a rail vehicle leaving the track. This prevents automatic re–<br />

energisati<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit after the removal of the train shunt.<br />

The interrupter is a metal device attached to the four foot side of the stock rail<br />

and usually insulated from it. It comprises a main body, a narrow neck and a<br />

head which is adjacent to the running edge and designed to break off when a rail<br />

vehicle passes over it. C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to the head and the body such<br />

that electrical c<strong>on</strong>tinuity is provided between them until the interrupter is broken.<br />

The arrangement is shown in Figure B11.<br />

The interrupter is fixed within the track circuit to the stock rail (as shown in<br />

Figure B12). It is not fixed to the switch rail.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Points<br />

Figure B11<br />

B16 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

12 Mutual Interference<br />

Between <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B17 of 25<br />

Note: In all cases, the interrupter is fixed to the stock rail (as shown in Figure<br />

B12). It must not be fixed to the switch rail.<br />

Figure B12<br />

Stock Rail<br />

Switch Rail<br />

Correct Positi<strong>on</strong><br />

Incorrect Positi<strong>on</strong><br />

It is important to realise that where track circuits are c<strong>on</strong>nected together by a<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> rail, and detectors are used that are unable to discriminate between<br />

their own and other track circuit feeds, a degree of mutual interference between<br />

such track circuits is inevitable. This c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> may be introduced by design<br />

(single rail track circuits <strong>on</strong> electrified lines) or by failure (IRJ failure of double rail<br />

track circuits).<br />

The simplest way to describe mutual interference is to use the example of two<br />

d.c. single rail track circuits as shown in Figure B13 and Figure B14. It will be<br />

realised that this model also equates to a double rail insulated track circuit with a<br />

failed IRJ. Figure B13 shows the equivalent circuit in track circuit type format,<br />

whilst Figure B14 c<strong>on</strong>verts it to a standard electrical format for easier<br />

presentati<strong>on</strong> of cause and effect.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider the circuit in Figure B14 under c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s where VFB feed supply is<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected. Clearly, a voltage will appear across RRB as a result of VFA, the<br />

value of which will depend <strong>on</strong> circuit parameters. The extent to which this<br />

voltage is of c<strong>on</strong>cern depends up<strong>on</strong> its value relative to the operating values of<br />

the relay.<br />

Provided that the b<strong>on</strong>ding remains intact, an unsafe failure cannot arise from the<br />

mutual interference; either both track circuits will fail right side (occupied) or they<br />

will both show occupied when either <strong>on</strong>e of them is legitimately occupied.<br />

However, there is the possibility of a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure where a b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> occurs.<br />

It is not appropriate to explain all possible scenarios here; the possibility is<br />

menti<strong>on</strong>ed simply to c<strong>on</strong>vey the fact that some track circuit defects can be<br />

exceedingly difficult to understand and explain. Certain c<strong>on</strong>straints are applied<br />

to various track circuit designs in order to limit the possibility of wr<strong>on</strong>g side<br />

failure. Therefore, the design c<strong>on</strong>straints described in the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Handbook shall not be breached without expert advice.<br />

RAILTRACK B17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B18 of 25<br />

13 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Rail Breaks<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail TC A TC B<br />

Figure B13<br />

RCA<br />

RRA<br />

B18 RAILTRACK<br />

RSA<br />

Notes for Figure B13 and Figure B14:<br />

RFA<br />

VFA VFB<br />

Earth<br />

RFB<br />

RSB<br />

RRB<br />

RCB<br />

TC“A” TC“B”<br />

OPEN CIRCUIT FEED VOLTAGE VFA VFB<br />

FEED RESISTANCE RFA RFB<br />

RELAY RESISTANCE RRA RRB<br />

SIGNAL RAIL EARTH RESISTANCE RSA RSB<br />

COMMON RAIL EARTH RESISTANCE RCA RCB<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail<br />

Figure B14<br />

RFA<br />

VFA<br />

RRA<br />

Further <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

R CA<br />

Earth<br />

Where rails are series b<strong>on</strong>ded, a completely broken rail will be immediately<br />

detected as a right side track circuit failure (ie. occupied).<br />

Where the rails are not series b<strong>on</strong>ded, a broken rail will not be detected by the<br />

track circuit.<br />

R SA<br />

R CB<br />

RSB<br />

RRB<br />

RFB<br />

V FB


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

14 Jointless <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B19 of 25<br />

Insulated rail joints can be expensive both to install and to maintain, especially <strong>on</strong><br />

tracks subjected to high speed, high axle weight traffic or where there is an<br />

intensive service.<br />

The use of audio frequencies permits the physical limits of an individual track<br />

circuit to be defined by tuned short circuits between the rails rather than by<br />

insulati<strong>on</strong> in the rails themselves. C<strong>on</strong>sider two jointless track circuits abutting at<br />

a tuned z<strong>on</strong>e as shown in Figure B15. N<strong>on</strong>–track mounted equipment has been<br />

omitted for clarity.<br />

RAILTRACK B19<br />

Tuned<br />

Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

Feed F1 Tuning Tuning<br />

Feed F2<br />

Unit F1 Unit F2<br />

Figure B15<br />

The tuned z<strong>on</strong>e comprises a measured length of track with a tuning unit across<br />

the rails at each extremity. The track circuits operate at different audio<br />

frequencies and each tuning unit is designed to its own track frequency, such<br />

that the following criteria are obeyed:<br />

a) C<strong>on</strong>sider frequency F1:<br />

The F2 tuning unit behaves as a short circuit between the rails, due to series<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ance of its inductive and capacitive comp<strong>on</strong>ents.<br />

The F1 tuning unit tunes the two rails (inductive) and the F2 tuning unit short<br />

circuit to parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance, thus presenting a significant impedance to<br />

frequency F1.<br />

b) C<strong>on</strong>sider frequency F2:<br />

The F1 tuning unit behaves as a short circuit between the rails, due to series<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ance of its inductive and capacitive comp<strong>on</strong>ents.<br />

The F2 tuning unit tunes the two rails (inductive) and the F1 tuning unit short<br />

circuit to parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance, thus presenting a significant impedance to<br />

frequency F2.<br />

A wheelset proceeding al<strong>on</strong>g track circuit F1 will shunt the track circuit, but when<br />

it enters the tuned z<strong>on</strong>e its effectiveness will reduce until, having passed tuning<br />

unit F2 (short circuit at frequency F1), it will no l<strong>on</strong>ger shunt track circuit F1.<br />

Similarly, the wheelset would not shunt track circuit F2 as l<strong>on</strong>g as it remained <strong>on</strong><br />

track circuit F1, due to tuning unit F1 presenting a short circuit to frequency F2.<br />

As the wheelset passes F1 tuning unit, it commences to shunt frequency F2,<br />

becoming more effective as it progresses towards the F2 tuning unit and bey<strong>on</strong>d<br />

into F2 track circuit proper.


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B20 of 25<br />

15 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> and<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

By careful design of comp<strong>on</strong>ents, it is possible to arrange a short overlap in the<br />

centre of the tuned z<strong>on</strong>e where both track circuits are effectively shunted.<br />

Since the design of individual tuning units must take account of both frequencies,<br />

it is necessary to specify the exact frequencies involved. Such equipment is<br />

therefore produced for a fixed set of frequencies and those frequencies are<br />

used in pairs alternately al<strong>on</strong>g the track.<br />

Bey<strong>on</strong>d the boundaries of electrified areas, track circuit type and c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong><br />

can be selected <strong>on</strong> the basis of train detecti<strong>on</strong> and ec<strong>on</strong>omic criteria al<strong>on</strong>e.<br />

However, track circuit arrangements in electrified areas are c<strong>on</strong>strained by the<br />

need to ensure safe and reliable operati<strong>on</strong> of both signalling and tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

systems. This means that the track circuit must be immune to both false<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> and damage by the flow of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents through the rails.<br />

Parallel tracks are cross-b<strong>on</strong>ded at regular intervals, such that the tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

current from an individual train will have a number of different parallel paths back<br />

to the supply. This minimises the impedance to the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply and hence<br />

the volt drop, whilst it also limits the amount of current which can flow through an<br />

individual track circuit.<br />

Although permitted track circuits will be inherently immune to false operati<strong>on</strong><br />

(wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure) from the presence of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents flowing in the rails, in<br />

some circumstances these can be of a magnitude sufficient to cause damage to<br />

equipment, or right side failure of the track circuit. The levels of tracti<strong>on</strong> current<br />

that the track circuit is subjected to can generally be sufficiently limited by well<br />

maintained b<strong>on</strong>ding, track circuit length restricti<strong>on</strong>s (single rail track circuits) and<br />

balance of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents between rails (double rail track circuits).<br />

Specific restricti<strong>on</strong>s related to interference are c<strong>on</strong>tained within the individual<br />

track circuit type Codes of Practice.<br />

15.1 D.C. Electrified Areas<br />

In d.c. electrified areas, the relatively low supply voltage results in high currents<br />

returning to the sub-stati<strong>on</strong>s via the running rails. In order to minimise voltage<br />

drop in the d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> supply, wherever possible, all running rails are used for<br />

the return of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents and therefore double rail track circuits are used.<br />

However, in S&C areas, it is not usually possible to b<strong>on</strong>d the track in double rail<br />

form, therefore single rail track circuits have to be installed.<br />

Traditi<strong>on</strong>ally, all track circuits in d.c. electrified areas, were operated with 50Hz<br />

a.c. current, using phase sensitive vane relays. Double rail track circuits, with<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds providing tracti<strong>on</strong> current c<strong>on</strong>tinuity, were provided <strong>on</strong> plain<br />

line and single rail track circuits in S&C areas. More recently, jointless<br />

modulated audio frequency track circuits have been introduced, reducing the<br />

number of IRJs and impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds required in plain line areas.<br />

B20 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B21 of 25<br />

15.2 A.C. Electrified Areas<br />

In present 25kV a.c. electrified areas, tracti<strong>on</strong> currents are lower than in d.c.<br />

systems and in most cases, single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return is sufficient for<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> purposes. Increased traffic levels and alternative feeding<br />

arrangements, may however, increase the need for both running rails to be used<br />

for tracti<strong>on</strong> return.<br />

Traditi<strong>on</strong>ally, all track circuits in a.c. electrified areas, were operated with d.c.<br />

current, although feed and relay comp<strong>on</strong>ents are specifically modified to provide<br />

protecti<strong>on</strong> from damage and immunity to interference.<br />

15.3 Dual Electrified Areas<br />

Where tracks may be subject to the flow of both a.c. and d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> currents,<br />

the choice of track circuits is limited to those that are immune to both and do not<br />

use frequencies (including harm<strong>on</strong>ics) c<strong>on</strong>tained in the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply.<br />

15.4 Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Where tracti<strong>on</strong> return current flows through a single rail track circuit, the majority<br />

of the current will flow in the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail, resulting in a voltage drop al<strong>on</strong>g it’s<br />

length. This voltage drop is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the current, the track circuit length<br />

and the impedance of the rail. With a train shunt applied toward the feed end of<br />

the track circuit, this voltage drop can be presented across the signal rail and<br />

track receiver in series. Dependent up<strong>on</strong> the relative impedance of the signal rail<br />

and the receiver at the frequencies of interest, a proporti<strong>on</strong> of this voltage will be<br />

applied across the receiver.<br />

If the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply c<strong>on</strong>tains some voltage disturbance at a frequency to which<br />

the track circuit is sensitive, then this will be c<strong>on</strong>ducted through trains and flow<br />

as current through the running rails. If this is of sufficient magnitude, form and<br />

durati<strong>on</strong>, then with a train shunt at the feed end, a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure could<br />

occur.<br />

In additi<strong>on</strong> to c<strong>on</strong>ducting the voltage ripple present <strong>on</strong> the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply,<br />

modern tracti<strong>on</strong> units employing active c<strong>on</strong>trol methods (such as three phase<br />

drives) can actively generate currents at other frequencies and superimpose<br />

them <strong>on</strong>to the supply. Whilst the tracti<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>trol systems can be designed so as<br />

to avoid critical frequencies as far as possible, some interference c<strong>on</strong>tent at<br />

frequencies used by track circuits may be produced. Depending up<strong>on</strong> the type<br />

of tracti<strong>on</strong> unit, the magnitude of this interference c<strong>on</strong>tent may be limited by the<br />

use of an Interference Current M<strong>on</strong>itor Unit (ICMU) <strong>on</strong> the train, which will isolate<br />

the tracti<strong>on</strong> unit from the supply if sufficient interference flowing through the<br />

train, is detected. These ICMUs however, take a finite time to operate, and<br />

whilst the operate delay, due to the use of slow operating repeat relays, is<br />

generally sufficient to cope with transient interference, it may be necessary to<br />

modify the track circuits before the train can reliably operate.<br />

RAILTRACK B21


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B22 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15.5 Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Where both running rails are used for tracti<strong>on</strong> current return, the electrificati<strong>on</strong><br />

arrangements, using impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, are designed to keep the currents<br />

flowing in each rail balanced. Under such c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, any interference c<strong>on</strong>tent<br />

within the tracti<strong>on</strong> current should similarly be balanced and little or no<br />

interference applied to the receiver. However, due to a number of reas<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

interference currents flowing through the track circuit may be, or become,<br />

imbalanced:<br />

• presence of check rails;<br />

• track curves;<br />

• earthing of <strong>on</strong>e rail;<br />

• b<strong>on</strong>ding differences;<br />

• asymmetric positi<strong>on</strong> of c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail / catenary;<br />

• broken rails;<br />

• disc<strong>on</strong>nected impedance b<strong>on</strong>d sideleads<br />

When the track circuit becomes unbalanced any interference in the tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

return current due either to disturbances in the supply, or generated by tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

units, will result in interference being presented to the receiver. The magnitude<br />

of this interference is largely independent of the length of the track circuit, but is<br />

proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the imbalance of currents flowing through the receiver end of the<br />

track circuit (either an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d or tuned z<strong>on</strong>e). Therefore, with a train<br />

occupying the track circuit, interference can be applied to the track receiver,<br />

which if of sufficient magnitude, form and durati<strong>on</strong>, will cause a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure<br />

of the track circuit.<br />

15.6 Rolling Stock Compatibility<br />

Means of providing compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, without<br />

the use of ICMUs, is preferable and modern tracti<strong>on</strong> units may be acceptable for<br />

use with the existing track circuits, if it can be dem<strong>on</strong>strated that the predictable<br />

level of interference which may be generated, is insufficient to interfere with<br />

correct track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>. Such an assessment will need to make<br />

reas<strong>on</strong>able assumpti<strong>on</strong>s as to the proporti<strong>on</strong> of tracti<strong>on</strong> current that can flow<br />

through an individual track circuit, the resulting magnitude of interference which<br />

will be presented to the track receiver and the minimum resp<strong>on</strong>se time of the<br />

receiver and interlocking. Therefore the validity of such assessments relies up<strong>on</strong><br />

the following:<br />

• cross b<strong>on</strong>ding between parallel tracks;<br />

• track circuit length limitati<strong>on</strong>s;<br />

• preventi<strong>on</strong> and detecti<strong>on</strong> of imbalance;<br />

• integrity of rails and b<strong>on</strong>ds;<br />

• operating times.<br />

CAUTION: Although general precauti<strong>on</strong>s and limits that provide<br />

compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, have been included<br />

in the Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook Codes of Practice, these are not<br />

comprehensive and special c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s may apply to certain routes to<br />

permit the operati<strong>on</strong> of rolling stock.<br />

Where new types of rolling stock are to be introduced, existing c<strong>on</strong>straints<br />

will require reassessment, as to their adequacy.<br />

B22 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B23 of 25<br />

16.1 Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are devices which allow tracti<strong>on</strong> current (d.c. or a.c.) to pass<br />

through, whilst limiting the track circuit current. They are necessary wherever<br />

double rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return and IRJ dependent track circuits coexist.<br />

An impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is c<strong>on</strong>figured to provide a very low impedance path to<br />

double rail a.c. or d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> return currents (typically less than 0.4mΩ per coil)<br />

whilst presenting a high enough a.c. impedance between the rails (typically<br />

greater than 15Ω) to allow the operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits. It also provides a<br />

centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> for cross b<strong>on</strong>ding, which minimises the passage of track<br />

circuit current between circuit currents.<br />

The winding c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails is comprised of heavy gauge copper,<br />

fitted with a centre tap c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> and wound <strong>on</strong> a heavy ir<strong>on</strong> core. Provided<br />

that each running rail carries equal amounts of tracti<strong>on</strong> return current, the<br />

current from each rail passes in opposite directi<strong>on</strong>s through the coil from the rail<br />

to the centre tap c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. The net flux in the ir<strong>on</strong> circuit will be zero and the<br />

impedance to tracti<strong>on</strong> current (d.c. or a.c.) will be very small, as shown in Figure<br />

B16.<br />

Figure B16<br />

IRJ IRJ<br />

1/2 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Current<br />

1/2 Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Current<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>d Cross B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Transmitter<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Receiver<br />

The a.c. track circuit current attempts to flow between the two rails and is<br />

therefore in the same directi<strong>on</strong> through the two halves of the winding, resulting in<br />

the track circuit current seeing a larger, albeit still relatively small, impedance.<br />

<strong>Track</strong>–to–track cross b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> double rail track circuits must be provided via<br />

the centre taps of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> electrified lines, as shown in Figure B17.<br />

Figure B17<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

RAILTRACK B23


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B24 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16.2 Auxilary Winding<br />

The impedance available from the simple impedance b<strong>on</strong>d remains a handicap.<br />

It is therefore usual to enhance the impedance by parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance of the<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> winding, use being made of a step–up (approximately 50:1) transformer<br />

to reduce the value of the necessary capacitance to realistic levels. Another<br />

soluti<strong>on</strong> is to c<strong>on</strong>nect the res<strong>on</strong>ating winding to form an auto transformer, refer<br />

to 16.2.2.<br />

16.2.1 Res<strong>on</strong>ated Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

The inducti<strong>on</strong> of the tracti<strong>on</strong> winding is tuned to res<strong>on</strong>ance at or near the track<br />

circuit operating frequency by use of a parallel capacitor, which raises the rail to<br />

rail impedance at the track circuit frequency, and thereby reduces the b<strong>on</strong>d’s<br />

effect <strong>on</strong> the track circuit.<br />

For power frequency track circuits (eg. 50 Hz), the value of capacitance required<br />

to attain res<strong>on</strong>ance is reduced to an achievable magnitude, by applying the<br />

capacitance via an auxiliary winding, as shown in Figure B18.<br />

To Next B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Figure B18<br />

Auxiliary Flux<br />

Winding<br />

B24 RAILTRACK<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

The value of capacitance required to achieve res<strong>on</strong>ance depends <strong>on</strong> the<br />

following:<br />

a) Tracti<strong>on</strong> winding inductance, which may differ between designs. The<br />

capacitance required will vary inversely to the inductance.<br />

b) Auxiliary turns ratio, which may differ between designs. The capacitance<br />

required will vary inversely as the square of the turns ratio.<br />

c) <strong>Track</strong> circuit frequency, where the capacitance required will vary inversely<br />

as the square of the frequency.<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ated impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are used at the feed and relay ends of jointed<br />

audio frequency track circuits and for all intermediate b<strong>on</strong>ds associated with<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> cross b<strong>on</strong>ding.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B25 of 25<br />

16.2.2 Auto Coupled Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

The method used to couple the feed and relay ends of certain designs of track<br />

circuit into the track as shown in Figure B19. At the feed end, the reduced<br />

voltage appearing across the the tracti<strong>on</strong> winding is applied to the rails whilst at<br />

the relay end, the current from the track circuit passing through the tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

winding is usefully employed to drive the relay.<br />

IRJ<br />

To Next B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Figure B19<br />

IRJ<br />

To <strong>Track</strong> Relay Or<br />

Feed<br />

RAILTRACK B25<br />

OR<br />

To Rails<br />

To <strong>Track</strong><br />

Relay Or Feed<br />

A double rail A.C. track circuit with auto–coupled impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is shown in<br />

Figure B20.<br />

Figure B20<br />

110V<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ant B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trol<br />

Local<br />

110V<br />

If the tracti<strong>on</strong> current in each rail is not equal, the imbalance results in a net flux<br />

in the ir<strong>on</strong> circuit, and if that flux is sufficient to saturate the ir<strong>on</strong> core, the track<br />

circuit current will be presented with a short circuit. It is therefore important to<br />

make the b<strong>on</strong>d as tolerant as possible of tracti<strong>on</strong> current imbalance and this is<br />

d<strong>on</strong>e by creating an air gap in the magnetic circuit. Such b<strong>on</strong>ds will tolerate 20%<br />

imbalance before saturati<strong>on</strong>.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Drawing Symbols <strong>on</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part C<br />

Schematic Symbols<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C1 of 11<br />

The schematic symbols described here apply to b<strong>on</strong>ding plans. Symbols<br />

depicting track circuits <strong>on</strong> signalling plans are to be in accordance with<br />

GK/RT0004.<br />

2.1 B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding plans must show c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s which require tracti<strong>on</strong> voltage warning<br />

labels, as shown in Part E.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Electrified lines: Rails b<strong>on</strong>ded, but not track circuited.<br />

Electrified lines: Only <strong>on</strong>e rail c<strong>on</strong>tinuity b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines (In electrified areas): Rails not b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return: In n<strong>on</strong>-electrified areas <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

shall be drawn bold, this shall be the series rail for CR<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding and the positive or BX rail for DRDS B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Signal rail insulated by IRJs<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail<br />

Stainless steel strip <strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

RAILTRACK C1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C2 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulating rail joints: Separate track circuits <strong>on</strong> both sides.<br />

Insulating rail joints: <strong>Track</strong> circuit <strong>on</strong> left, n<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> right.<br />

Insulating rail joints: <strong>Track</strong> circuit <strong>on</strong> right, n<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> left.<br />

Insulating rail joints: Between different secti<strong>on</strong>s of the same<br />

track circuit.<br />

Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

C2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Structure b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C3 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Signal engineering equipment to rail b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Structure to Earth Wire.<br />

Rail to rail b<strong>on</strong>d (cross b<strong>on</strong>ds) - (<strong>on</strong>e example).<br />

Return c<strong>on</strong>ductor or earth wire to rail b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupter.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for dc track circuits.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for ac track circuits.<br />

RAILTRACK C3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C4 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for HVI track circuits.<br />

Guard boarding The provisi<strong>on</strong> of guard boarding will be<br />

indicated by a thin line <strong>on</strong> whichever side<br />

of the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail it is required.<br />

A suitable note may be added if required.<br />

Insulated buffer stops.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-insulated buffer stops.<br />

Insulated points.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-insulated points.<br />

2.2 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Actuator Interference Detector (TCAID)<br />

TCAID-N or TCAID (MC)<br />

TCAID-D, detecti<strong>on</strong> to the right<br />

TCAID-D, detecti<strong>on</strong> to the left<br />

C4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C5 of 11<br />

2.3 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

If an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>tains an internal res<strong>on</strong>ating capacitor, the symbol must<br />

be shown filled in.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Double rail to double rail track circuits.<br />

Double rail to single rail track circuits.<br />

Double rail track circuits to n<strong>on</strong>-track circuited line.<br />

Intermediate impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds (<strong>Track</strong> to track b<strong>on</strong>ds): Using impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

in double rail areas.<br />

Tuned impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

RAILTRACK C5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C6 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

2.4 Symbols For TI21 Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Tuned z<strong>on</strong>e with a transmitter and a receiver.<br />

Transmitter of centre fed track circuit at an end tuning unit (ETU).<br />

Receiver at an IRJ with an end tuning unit (ETU).<br />

Low power: Show at transmitter <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

Example of a TI21 track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan.<br />

C6 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

2.5 Symbols For Reed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Transmitter.<br />

Receiver.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C7 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Intermediate simple loop (loop symbol points towards TX).<br />

Compound loop (loop symbol points towards TX).<br />

Example of a jointed reed track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan electrified.<br />

Example of a jointless reed track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan.<br />

Note: <strong>Track</strong> circuit frequency is indicated in ( ) brackets following the track circuit name.<br />

RAILTRACK C7


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C8 of 11<br />

3 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Symbols<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Separate Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans are <strong>on</strong>ly used <strong>on</strong> the former Southern<br />

Regi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Running rail b<strong>on</strong>ded at each rail joint for dc electric tracti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Insulated rail joint.<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ating b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit cut secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

To specify that more than <strong>on</strong>e b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

is required, indicate as shown.<br />

C8 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Cable Identificati<strong>on</strong> Codes<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Single protective boarding.<br />

Double protective boarding.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C9 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulated rail joint and c<strong>on</strong>tinuity cable<br />

to eliminate magnetisati<strong>on</strong> of points.<br />

Aluminium advance plate: Only installed for attachment<br />

of tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ds in areas<br />

of single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return.<br />

a Single 500mm sheathed copper cable (soldered lugs) or single 800mm<br />

sheathed aluminium cable (crimped aluminium or Cadweld aluminium lug).<br />

c Single 161mm sheathed copper cable (gas weld heads).<br />

d Single 161mm sheathed copper cable (soldered lugs) or single 240mm sheathed<br />

aluminium cable (Cadweld aluminium or copper lug or crimped aluminium lug).<br />

f Single 161mm bare copper cable (gas weld heads) or single 150mm aluminium<br />

cable (crimped 20 bi-metal b<strong>on</strong>d heads).<br />

g Single 161mm copper cable (soldered 20 copper b<strong>on</strong>d heads).<br />

h Single 161mm sheathed cable (<strong>on</strong>e gas weld head and <strong>on</strong>e soldered lug).<br />

j Single 161mm sheathed cable (<strong>on</strong>e soldered lug and <strong>on</strong>e soldered 20 copper b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

head) or single 150mm sheathed aluminium cable (<strong>on</strong>e crimped 20 bi-metal b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

head and <strong>on</strong>e crimped aluminium lug).<br />

m Single 1,000mm sheathed aluminium cable.<br />

Nn Single 630mm sheathed copper cable.<br />

RAILTRACK C9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C10 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

4 Engineer’s<br />

Scale Diagrams<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> Symbols<br />

These symbols are to be used <strong>on</strong> the 1:100 and 1:200 scale diagrams when<br />

requesting IRJs and point insulati<strong>on</strong>s to be installed by the Permanent Way<br />

Engineer. The symbols are to be coloured red <strong>on</strong> plans returned to the<br />

Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

Note: On Permanent Way Engineer’s Plans, dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are to the inside<br />

edges of rails.<br />

Insulated rail joint required.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulated soleplate and stretcher bars required (positi<strong>on</strong> of insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

to be shown).<br />

Drilling of insulated soleplate for facing point lock required, to<br />

MD 82017 (positi<strong>on</strong> of insulati<strong>on</strong> to be shown).<br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machines with left hand drive (show in reverse for right<br />

hand drive). Standard facing points (not clamp locks), drilled to<br />

BRS-SM 318.<br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machine. Right hand drive for single or double slips (not<br />

clamp locks), drilled to BRS-SM 319.<br />

C10 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C11 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machine. Left hand drive for single or double slips (not<br />

clamp locks), drilled to BRS-SM 320.<br />

Indicates switch rail, stock rail and soleplate to be pre-drilled for<br />

hydraulic clamp locks with multiple drives and soleplate, in accordance<br />

with BRS-SM 2200, 2228, 2240, 2244 or 2260, as appropriate. If<br />

c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers are to be used, they are required to be drilled in<br />

accordance with BRS-SM 622.<br />

Stainless steel strip welded to rails required.<br />

RAILTRACK C11


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Design<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part D<br />

Planning and Design<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D1 of 20<br />

The principles laid down here apply to the planning, layout and design of all<br />

types of track circuits and track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding. Special requirements for<br />

individual types of track circuit are given in subsequent Codes of Practice within<br />

the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook. Signalling design requirements are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GK/RT0201.<br />

Many of the parameters affecting track circuit design are related to the physical<br />

and electrical characteristics of the trains operating over the track circuits.<br />

Dimensi<strong>on</strong>s of track secti<strong>on</strong>s which are critical for achieving safe and reliable<br />

detecti<strong>on</strong> are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RT0011 Appendix A. If the accuracy quoted<br />

cannot be attained, dimensi<strong>on</strong>s should be rounded up unless otherwise stated<br />

(ie. if a maximum is given).<br />

For a descripti<strong>on</strong> of terms and definiti<strong>on</strong>s used in track circuit design and<br />

operati<strong>on</strong>, see Part B.<br />

For details of symbols used <strong>on</strong> scheme plans and b<strong>on</strong>ding plans, see Part C.<br />

2.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding requirements are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RT0252.<br />

2.2 N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines<br />

The design of all track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility<br />

of the Signal Engineer.<br />

This requires the producti<strong>on</strong> of detailed scale b<strong>on</strong>ding plans for all track circuiting<br />

in switch & crossing work, usually based <strong>on</strong> the Permanent Way Engineer’s<br />

track layout plan. On plain line a detailed b<strong>on</strong>ding plan need not be produced,<br />

as l<strong>on</strong>g as sufficient detail of feed and relay leads is provided in lineside<br />

apparatus housing diagrams.<br />

2.3 Electrified Lines<br />

Both Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers require c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the running<br />

rails, so compatibility between them is essential. In additi<strong>on</strong>, there are a number<br />

of c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s up<strong>on</strong> which there is comm<strong>on</strong> reliance. It is therefore necessary<br />

to have comm<strong>on</strong> plans/records that show in detail the track b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

arrangements. There must be agreement between both parties before any new<br />

work or alterati<strong>on</strong>s are carried out. Design Standards are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GM/TT0126 and GM/TT0129.<br />

The Signal Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design of:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

b) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in tracti<strong>on</strong> rails of a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly electrified areas.<br />

c) The positi<strong>on</strong> of all insulated rail joints.<br />

d) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

RAILTRACK D1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D2 of 20<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Nomenclature<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

e) In a.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), all rail to<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s between impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong><br />

the same track.<br />

f) In dual a.c./d.c. and d.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern<br />

Regi<strong>on</strong>), the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility for impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is subject to<br />

special arrangements between the Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers.<br />

g) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for track<br />

circuit <strong>on</strong>ly purposes.<br />

h) All track circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

i) Identifying the need for Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding and specifying which b<strong>on</strong>ds are to<br />

be yellow.<br />

The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design of:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

b) All jumpers b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of tracti<strong>on</strong> rails and between<br />

the centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds in different tracks.<br />

c) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes.<br />

d) All other permanent tracti<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

2.4 Adjacent Lines<br />

In all cases where lines run adjacent to or cross each other, but are not<br />

physically c<strong>on</strong>nected, all these lines must be represented <strong>on</strong> the b<strong>on</strong>ding plans<br />

and the b<strong>on</strong>ding plans cross referenced to each other.<br />

Identificati<strong>on</strong> of individual track circuits is to be in accordance with Standard<br />

Signalling Principle No. 54 and must be shown <strong>on</strong> plans at c<strong>on</strong>venient intervals<br />

within the respective track circuit.<br />

To avoid c<strong>on</strong>fusi<strong>on</strong> with other plan annotati<strong>on</strong>, the following <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

designati<strong>on</strong>s are to be avoided:<br />

B, F, I, N, O, R, Q, T, CL, OL, HVI, RB, RN, RR, RT, RX, TB, TC, TF, TFR, TI,<br />

TJ, TN, TO, TR, TX, VT, IBJ, IRJ, OCC.<br />

D2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4 Choice of <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Type<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D3 of 20<br />

There are a number of design features of track circuits which c<strong>on</strong>strain choice<br />

for a given applicati<strong>on</strong>:<br />

a) The need to detect vehicles <strong>on</strong> poor rail surfaces.<br />

b) The need or otherwise to avoid insulated rail joints.<br />

c) The need for immunity to a.c. and/or d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> interference.<br />

d) The need to achieve maximum reliability at ec<strong>on</strong>omic cost.<br />

e) The need to track circuit through complex S & C.<br />

The Figure D1 summarises the key attributes and limitati<strong>on</strong>s of each type of<br />

track circuit.<br />

CAUTION: Although general precauti<strong>on</strong>s and limits that provide<br />

compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, have been included<br />

in the Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook Codes of Practice, these are not<br />

comprehensive and special c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s may apply to certain routes to<br />

permit the operati<strong>on</strong> of rolling stock.<br />

Where new types of rolling stock are to be introduced, existing c<strong>on</strong>straints<br />

will require reassessment, as to their adequacy.<br />

RAILTRACK D3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D4 of 20<br />

Type Suitable For<br />

Lightly Used<br />

Lines<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune #1<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

IRJs<br />

Required<br />

Immunity From Suitable<br />

For S & C<br />

a.c.<br />

50Hz d.c.<br />

Yes Yes Yes No Yes<br />

D.C. Diode #1 Yes Yes No No No<br />

TI21 #1 No No Yes#4 Yes No<br />

HVI #1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />

D.C. Low Voltage Plain No Yes No No Yes<br />

D.C. Low Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

Plain<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune/D.C.<br />

Tolerant<br />

A.C. WR Quick<br />

Release<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

No Yes Yes No Yes<br />

Yes Yes No No Yes<br />

Yes Yes Yes Yes#2 Yes<br />

No Yes No No Yes<br />

A.C. 50Hz Vane No Yes No Yes Yes#3<br />

A.C. 83.3Hz Vane No Yes Yes Yes Yes#3<br />

Reed No Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />

Aster/SF15 No No No No No<br />

Notes:<br />

# 1 Preferred track circuits for new works.<br />

# 2 Limited dc immunity. Used in an area of ac lines close to ac/dc dual<br />

lines not fitted with any means of isolating the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail systems. Use<br />

must be subject to a proper immunisati<strong>on</strong> evaluati<strong>on</strong> exercise.<br />

# 3 Single rail type has restricted length but adequate for S & C<br />

applicati<strong>on</strong>. Double rail type is difficult in complex S & C but permits l<strong>on</strong>g<br />

length in plain line.<br />

# 4 The use of TI21 <strong>on</strong> ac electrified lines requires the earthing of<br />

lineside structures to be to a separate c<strong>on</strong>ductor rather than to the rail.<br />

This precludes the use of TI21 <strong>on</strong> ac lines unless part of a major new<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> scheme.<br />

Figure D1<br />

D4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5 Cut Secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D5 of 20<br />

Designing cut secti<strong>on</strong>s into a track circuit is a method of reducing the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous<br />

length. The track circuit is split into individual track circuits, each <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trolling<br />

the same final TPR. They are indicated as <strong>on</strong>e track circuit <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s<br />

panel. Special care must be taken where an individual secti<strong>on</strong> of such a track<br />

circuit is used separately for c<strong>on</strong>trol purposes (eg. level crossing timing).<br />

The cascading of cut secti<strong>on</strong>s (ie. c<strong>on</strong>trolling the feed to a track circuit by the<br />

relay of the next track circuit) is not permitted. The individual cut secti<strong>on</strong>s should<br />

be either returned individually to the interlocking or summated in the TPR lineside<br />

circuit or, in the case of SSI, summated in the data.<br />

Cut secti<strong>on</strong>s must be identified in accordance with GK/RT0009 (ie. AA1, AA2,<br />

AA3, etc) in the directi<strong>on</strong> of normal running. The two porti<strong>on</strong>s of a centre fed<br />

jointless track circuit are treated separately for this purpose (eg. AA2 and AA3 in<br />

Figure D2).<br />

Figure D2<br />

(50HZ)<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

AA1 AA2 AA3 AB<br />

Relay Feed<br />

(Centre Fed)<br />

Jointless<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

AA2 AA3 AB<br />

RX<br />

AA2/3<br />

TX<br />

RX RX<br />

Where a m<strong>on</strong>itoring device is provided, it must indicate to the technician the<br />

locati<strong>on</strong> at which the failed relay/receiver is housed, irrespective of the line<br />

affected. With reference to Figure D3, an example of the labelling for an<br />

individual display would be “Loc 10 (AA2, AA3, BC2, BC3)”.<br />

AA2<br />

BC3<br />

Figure D3<br />

AA2 AA3<br />

RX RX<br />

AA3/4<br />

AA4<br />

TX RX<br />

AA3 AA4<br />

BC2 BC1<br />

BC3 BC2<br />

BC1/2<br />

BC1 BB6<br />

RX RX TX<br />

RX RX<br />

LOC. 10 LOC. 11 LOC. 12<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits must not c<strong>on</strong>sist of more than two n<strong>on</strong>–m<strong>on</strong>itored cut secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(where track circuits are centre fed, four receivers (Rxs) may be n<strong>on</strong>–<br />

m<strong>on</strong>itored).<br />

RAILTRACK D5<br />

AB1<br />

TR<br />

AB1<br />

BB6


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D6 of 20<br />

6 Operating Times<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The m<strong>on</strong>itoring device will usually be housed at the nearest interlocking, but this<br />

will largely be governed by the routine and out–of–hours fault finding cover<br />

arrangements which exist in the vicinity.<br />

The transmissi<strong>on</strong> of informati<strong>on</strong> to the m<strong>on</strong>itoring device may be achieved by<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>al FDM channels, a low–cost FDM system approved for use in signalling<br />

or telecommunicati<strong>on</strong>s cables or direct wire circuits.<br />

6.1 Time Delays<br />

There can be significant differences between the drop–away and pick–up times<br />

of different types of track circuit, such that the rear track may register clear<br />

before the forward <strong>on</strong>e registers occupied. The detecti<strong>on</strong> of the vehicle is<br />

therefore momentarily lost, resulting in a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure, which could permit<br />

the irregular release of vital interlocking. To overcome this, additi<strong>on</strong>al time<br />

delays must be built into the pick–up time of track repeaters, the precise<br />

requirement being dependent up<strong>on</strong> the combinati<strong>on</strong> of track circuit types<br />

involved.<br />

The indicati<strong>on</strong> circuits to the signalman may be transmitted via a TDM or FDM<br />

link. Therefore the transmissi<strong>on</strong> system reacti<strong>on</strong> times must also be c<strong>on</strong>sidered<br />

to ensure that the signalman does not observe an apparent loss of train<br />

detecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

6.2 Operating Categories And C<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

In order to simplify the number of possible permutati<strong>on</strong>s, track circuits are<br />

assigned to operating categories as follows:<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay Operating Characteristics Operating Category<br />

Slow to Pick Up - Quick to Drop Away A<br />

Medium to Pick Up - Medium to Drop Away B<br />

Quick to Pick Up - Slow to Drop Away C<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Type Operating Category<br />

TI21 A<br />

UM71 (French A<br />

D.C. (all types) B<br />

Phase sensitive a.c. (50Hz, 75Hz & 83.3Hz) B<br />

Aster B<br />

Reed with adjustable track filter B<br />

Western Regi<strong>on</strong> “Quick Release” (a.c./d.c.) B<br />

Diode B<br />

Coded B<br />

GEC Alsthom High Voltage Impulse (HVI) C<br />

Reed without adjustable track filter C<br />

D6 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D7 of 20<br />

With Geographical systems, the differing combinati<strong>on</strong>s of abutting categories of<br />

track circuits need to be examined and dealt with specially, according to the<br />

original design principles. With free wired relay interlocking and SSI, they must<br />

be dealt with as follows:<br />

Category A<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits do not require<br />

a slow to pick up TPR. Therefore, the TR may be used directly in c<strong>on</strong>trols.<br />

When used with an SSI, standard track circuit data must be used.<br />

Category B<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits require <strong>on</strong>e<br />

slow to pick up TPR, in accordance with Figure D4<br />

When used with an SSI, standard track circuit data must be used.<br />

Category C and Category B abutting Category C<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits must be<br />

provided with two slow to pick up TPRs, in accordance with Figure D5. The TR<br />

and TPR must be in the same locati<strong>on</strong> case or equipment room. The T2PR<br />

must be c<strong>on</strong>trolled directly by c<strong>on</strong>tacts of both TR and TPR to prevent the drop–<br />

away of T2PR from being unnecessarily delayed whilst still achieving the delayed<br />

pick–up required.<br />

When used with an SSI, track circuit data with “extra delay” must be used.<br />

Where the time delay is achieved by relay cascade, it is important that other<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tacts of the TR and any intermediate repeater relays are not used for c<strong>on</strong>trol<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong> purposes. To prevent inadvertent subsequent use, a suitable note<br />

must be made <strong>on</strong> the C<strong>on</strong>tact Analysis Sheet.<br />

A schedule must be provided listing all TPRs, the individual secti<strong>on</strong>s repeated by<br />

each TPR and the type of track circuit (including the frequency in the case of a<br />

jointless track circuit).<br />

B50<br />

N50<br />

Figure D4<br />

B50<br />

N50<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure D5<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TR<br />

BR 933<br />

EG TPR<br />

RAILTRACK D7<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TPR<br />

EG TPR<br />

BR 933<br />

BR 933<br />

EG TPR<br />

EG T2PR


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D8 of 20<br />

7 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Interrupters<br />

8 Length of <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The interrupter (BRS-SM 374) is designed to be mounted <strong>on</strong> the stock rail, not<br />

the switch rail, and is electrically insulated from it. It is to be mounted as near as<br />

possible to the switch toe, at a positi<strong>on</strong> where the flangeway gap is not less than<br />

70mm when the switch is closed.<br />

An interrupter may be either directly c<strong>on</strong>trolled in series with the track circuit or<br />

part of a separate circuit utilising an interrupter relay according to circumstances.<br />

The interrupter must be part of a separate circuit unless all of the following<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s apply:<br />

• The line is n<strong>on</strong>–electrified.<br />

• The track circuit <strong>on</strong> which the interrupter is wired is a d.c. track circuit.<br />

• The operati<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by by the interrupter will place to danger any<br />

necessary signal <strong>on</strong> adjoining lines.<br />

Note: The b<strong>on</strong>ding of the interrupter must be of opposite polarity to the rail <strong>on</strong><br />

which it is mounted.<br />

In all other circumstances, the interrupter must be part of a separate circuit<br />

incorporating a track circuit interrupter relay. The interrupter relay is c<strong>on</strong>trolled<br />

directly by the interrupter itself and its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts are used to c<strong>on</strong>trol all<br />

repeat relays of the required track circuit. Where necessary, an interrupter relay<br />

may c<strong>on</strong>trol more than <strong>on</strong>e track circuit or may be c<strong>on</strong>trolled by more than <strong>on</strong>e<br />

interrupter.<br />

Minimum<br />

To cater for the l<strong>on</strong>gest wheel base vehicles, a standard minimum effective track<br />

circuit length of 18.3m must be provided for new and altered works. If this<br />

minimum length cannot be achieved, alternative safeguards must be provided,<br />

(eg. sequential clearance of the track circuits in the interlockings).<br />

Maximum<br />

The maximum lengths quoted in individual Codes of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Handbook are based <strong>on</strong> a ballast resistance of 3Ωkm for timber<br />

sleepered track and 5Ωkm for c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepered track. If it appears likely that<br />

a track circuit will be required to operate at or near its maximum permitted<br />

length, tests should be made to ascertain whether ballast c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s etc, are<br />

satisfactory, particularly in wet weather, before the scheme design is finalised.<br />

The unpredictable effect of level crossings should also be borne in mind.<br />

On electrified lines, track circuits may have to be further restricted in length in<br />

order to limit the effects of interference from the tracti<strong>on</strong> system.<br />

Certain track circuit types require a greater minimum length due to their<br />

operating characteristics. See the relevant Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Handbook<br />

D8 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Gaps<br />

and Staggered<br />

IRJs<br />

10 Selective Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 Bad Rail Surface<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D9 of 20<br />

It is essential that all classes of vehicle, irrespective of wheelbase arrangement,<br />

are detected by the track circuiting, otherwise false track circuit clearance may<br />

lead to premature movements of points or irregular release of signals. Based <strong>on</strong><br />

the dimensi<strong>on</strong>s of existing rolling stock and allowing for future developments, the<br />

following shall apply:<br />

a) The maximum dead secti<strong>on</strong> between two track circuits in areas of<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous track circuiting is 2.6m. This is the minimum wheelbase of<br />

vehicles working unattached.<br />

b) Opposite IRJs must be regarded as the ideal arrangement. If unavoidable,<br />

physically staggered overlaps between nominally opposite IRJs must not<br />

exceed the following limits:<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified areas 2.6m<br />

Electrified areas if the tracti<strong>on</strong> rails overlap 2.6m<br />

Electrified areas if the insulated rails overlap 2.1m *<br />

Isle of Wight lines 1.7m *<br />

Note*: These distances are stipulated by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer to<br />

prevent a motor bogie losing its negative return path (see Figure D12 for<br />

clarificati<strong>on</strong>).<br />

a) There must be at least 18.3m between the nearest joint of any physically<br />

staggered pair and an IRJ defining a clearance point at the end of the track<br />

circuit. Where this cannot be obtained, special sequential c<strong>on</strong>trols must be<br />

provided.<br />

b) If the physical stagger exceeds 1.6m, there must be at least 18.3m between<br />

the nearest joint of the staggered pair and the next IRJ. If the stagger is less<br />

than 1.6m, this distance may be reduced to 11m. Where the requirement<br />

cannot be met, special sequential c<strong>on</strong>trols must be provided.<br />

c) Full details of critical dimensi<strong>on</strong>s for train detecti<strong>on</strong> are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GK/RT0011.<br />

Operati<strong>on</strong> of a porti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by the selecti<strong>on</strong> of the positi<strong>on</strong>s of a set<br />

of points is not permitted. Such porti<strong>on</strong>s must be separately track circuited.<br />

At locati<strong>on</strong>s where oil film or rust is excessive, (eg. tracti<strong>on</strong> depots, terminal<br />

platform lines, etc), a stainless steel strip can be applied to the surface of the<br />

running rail by the Permanent Way Engineer. This must be shown <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

plans, using the symbol specified in Part C. The vibrati<strong>on</strong> caused by the<br />

resulting uneven rail surface restricts its applicati<strong>on</strong> to very low speed<br />

applicati<strong>on</strong>s (5 mph maximum).<br />

Alternatively, the GEC Alsthom High Voltage Impulse (HVI) track circuit may be<br />

used (see GK/RC0756).<br />

12 Emergency<br />

Crossovers Where a crossover is clipped and padlocked or worked from an adjacent ground<br />

frame and subject <strong>on</strong>ly to an emergency release, track circuiting is not required<br />

for movements over the crossover.<br />

RAILTRACK D9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D10 of 20<br />

13 Insulated Rail Joints<br />

and B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

13.1 Definiti<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ding Types<br />

When b<strong>on</strong>ding secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail together to form track circuits, equipment of<br />

differing performance has to be used depending up<strong>on</strong> the type of track circuit<br />

and the type or absence of electrificati<strong>on</strong>; eg. a jumper b<strong>on</strong>d or fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

may vary in design depending up<strong>on</strong>:<br />

• whether or not it is part of a tracti<strong>on</strong> rail system;<br />

• whether or not it is proved intact via series b<strong>on</strong>ding.;<br />

• whether or not it is part of a n<strong>on</strong>–series “safety–through–diversity” system.<br />

In order to avoid repetiti<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding equipment detail in each secti<strong>on</strong> of this<br />

handbook, a method of classifying b<strong>on</strong>ding types has been developed in which<br />

fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding is identified separately from jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding, the ‘family tree’<br />

being shown in Figure D6.<br />

Standard<br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Figure D6<br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Yellow<br />

Standard<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Yellow<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Standard<br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

13.1.1 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This type of b<strong>on</strong>ding is used to improve the reliability of the electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

between pieces of rail which are already in casual electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact by virtue of<br />

their c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. Whilst the most obvious item in this category is the un–<br />

insulated fishplate, this method of b<strong>on</strong>ding extends to elements of S & C, such<br />

as crossings, wing rails etc, where the comp<strong>on</strong>ents are also bolted together<br />

without intervening insulati<strong>on</strong>. Fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding is not shown <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans.<br />

There are two types of this b<strong>on</strong>ding:<br />

Standard Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used to b<strong>on</strong>d all fishplate rail joints <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

electrified lines.<br />

On d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines, this b<strong>on</strong>ding is <strong>on</strong>ly used <strong>on</strong> the<br />

insulated (signal) rail of single rail track circuits. The most comm<strong>on</strong> method is<br />

two galvanised ir<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds attached to the rail at each end with driven taper pins.<br />

It is installed by the Signal Engineer in all cases.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used to b<strong>on</strong>d all fishplate rail joints <strong>on</strong> d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines which<br />

form part of the tracti<strong>on</strong> current system. It is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

13.1.2 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This covers jumper cables which b<strong>on</strong>d together secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail for track circuit<br />

and/or tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes; those secti<strong>on</strong>s may themselves be formed from many<br />

D10 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D11 of 20<br />

individual pieces of rail which are b<strong>on</strong>ded together with fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding. There<br />

are four types of jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding:<br />

Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

A jumper b<strong>on</strong>d between secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail which is proved intact as part of fail–safe<br />

series b<strong>on</strong>ding and does not form any part of a tracti<strong>on</strong> current system.<br />

It is a light current cable installed by the Signal Engineer.<br />

Yellow Standard B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines or l<strong>on</strong>g spurs of insulated (signal) rail <strong>on</strong> electrified<br />

lines.<br />

A jumper b<strong>on</strong>d between secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail which is not proved intact by fail–safe<br />

series b<strong>on</strong>ding. Safety is assured by installing at least three alternative jumpers,<br />

such that two jumper disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are not, by themselves, unsafe. It is a<br />

mechanically robust light current cable installed by the Signal Engineer and<br />

identified either by a yellow sheath or a yellow sleeve at its terminati<strong>on</strong>. Its<br />

mechanical strength allows its electrical integrity to be inferred from regular visual<br />

inspecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> rated b<strong>on</strong>ding attached to the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail of electrified lines but which is<br />

not relied up<strong>on</strong> for the integrity of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Yellow Tracti<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Provided in accordance with the same design principles as Yellow Standard<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding, except that it is tracti<strong>on</strong> current rated.<br />

It is installed by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer (except impedance b<strong>on</strong>d end<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s which are c<strong>on</strong>nected by the Signal Engineer).<br />

13.2 Design Principles for Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The design principles whereby the need for yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding is identified are the<br />

same for both n<strong>on</strong>–electrified and electrified lines. Electrificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>ly affects the<br />

rating of b<strong>on</strong>d to be installed and the organisati<strong>on</strong> resp<strong>on</strong>sible for its installati<strong>on</strong><br />

and subsequent maintenance.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding shall ensure that a single or double disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not result<br />

in an unsafe c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. See GK/RT 0252.<br />

13.2.1 Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Where separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail are required to be electrically interc<strong>on</strong>nected in<br />

parallel, each secti<strong>on</strong> is to be b<strong>on</strong>ded to the adjacent secti<strong>on</strong> at each point of<br />

abutment using a yellow b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Each spur extremity is to be b<strong>on</strong>ded to another part of the same electrically<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> network, which is not itself a part of the same spur, using a yellow<br />

b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

In additi<strong>on</strong> to any switch reinforcement yellow b<strong>on</strong>d, each secti<strong>on</strong> must have at<br />

least three yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds attached to it in different physical locati<strong>on</strong>s, which<br />

should be a minimum of 20m apart. Additi<strong>on</strong>al yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are to be installed<br />

to achieve this and, wherever possible, the additi<strong>on</strong>al b<strong>on</strong>ds must c<strong>on</strong>nect to a<br />

different secti<strong>on</strong> from those already fitted.<br />

In the case of n<strong>on</strong>–electrified multiple track plain line, the comm<strong>on</strong> rails of parallel<br />

tracks must be cross b<strong>on</strong>ded together using yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds at the site of<br />

feed/relay ends and at least 1km intervals.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are to be clearly identified <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans as shown in Part C.<br />

RAILTRACK D11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D12 of 20<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Examples of the applicati<strong>on</strong> of this principle are shown in Figure D7.<br />

Figure D7<br />

Other Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Switch Reinforcement Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

D12 RAILTRACK<br />

Y<br />

13.2.2 Switch Reinforcement Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Wherever the rail designated to require yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding passes through a set of<br />

point switches, its c<strong>on</strong>tinuity is to be strengthened by a “Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d” as shown<br />

in Figure D8. Installati<strong>on</strong> for tracti<strong>on</strong> rails is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer, and for n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails is that of the the Signal Engineer.<br />

Figure D8<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail Through Points<br />

13.3 B<strong>on</strong>ding C<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

In order to avoid repetiti<strong>on</strong> whilst clearly identifying requirements, it is useful to<br />

define the four b<strong>on</strong>ding c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s and associated b<strong>on</strong>ding standards which<br />

can be used for particular cases:<br />

13.3.1 DRDS (Double Rail/Double Series)<br />

This is where each track circuit is fully isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in<br />

both rails or tuned z<strong>on</strong>es and each rail of the track circuit is series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

OR<br />

Y<br />

Y


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D13 of 20<br />

throughout except for permissible spurs (see 13.4). In electrified areas, there<br />

are no other electrificati<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ds from either rail other than via the centre<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to both running rails.<br />

Electrified Lines - Tracti<strong>on</strong> jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to both running rails.<br />

13.3.2 DRSS (Double Rail/Single Series)<br />

This is where each track circuit is fully isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in<br />

both rails, and <strong>on</strong>e rail of the track circuit is series b<strong>on</strong>ded throughout except for<br />

permissible spurs (see 13.4). The other rail of the track circuit c<strong>on</strong>tains elements<br />

of parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

rail and to the true series b<strong>on</strong>ded elements of<br />

the other rail.<br />

Electrified Lines - Not applicable<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ds to interc<strong>on</strong>nect the<br />

parallel elements.<br />

13.3.3 CR Class (Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail)<br />

This is where each track circuit is isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly (the signal rail), and that rail is series b<strong>on</strong>ded except for permissible spurs<br />

(see 13.4). The other rail is electrically comm<strong>on</strong> with adjacent track circuits and<br />

may have parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded elements, but does not carry tracti<strong>on</strong> current.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-electrified Lines<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

- Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the series<br />

Signal Rail.<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ds to the comm<strong>on</strong> rail.<br />

Electrified Lines<br />

13.3.4 SR (Single Rail)<br />

- Not Applicable<br />

This is where each track circuit is isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly (the signal rail), and that rail is series b<strong>on</strong>ded except for permissible spurs<br />

(see 13.4). The other rail is electrically comm<strong>on</strong> with adjacent track circuits and<br />

forms part of a mesh carrying tracti<strong>on</strong> current.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Not applicable<br />

Electrified Lines<br />

13.4 Permissible Spurs<br />

- Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the signal rail.<br />

Yellow tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds to the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail.<br />

This clause covers the permissible arrangements for parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded spur<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s of an otherwise series b<strong>on</strong>ded track circuit secti<strong>on</strong>. Parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

spurs <strong>on</strong> comm<strong>on</strong>/tracti<strong>on</strong> rail secti<strong>on</strong>s are not separately identified, since they<br />

are covered by the general requirements for b<strong>on</strong>ding of such rails.<br />

Spurs up to 13m, measured from the first joint or weld of a crossing, shall be<br />

permitted as shown in Figure D9. provided that there is a maximum of <strong>on</strong>e<br />

fishplated joint between the series b<strong>on</strong>ded rail and the end of the spur, and that<br />

this joint is properly b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Spurs up to a maximum of 60m, measured from the first joint or weld of a<br />

crossing, shall be permitted, provided they are yellow b<strong>on</strong>ded to the parent<br />

series rail.<br />

RAILTRACK D13


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D14 of 20<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Only One B<strong>on</strong>ded Fishplate Joint Permitted<br />

13 METRES MAX.<br />

If X Or Y >13m Then Additi<strong>on</strong>al Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds To The Stock Rails Will Be Required<br />

Figure D9<br />

D14 RAILTRACK<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

13.5 Series B<strong>on</strong>ding Simplificati<strong>on</strong><br />

If series b<strong>on</strong>ding becomes complex, it imposes penalties <strong>on</strong> both reliability and<br />

maintenance. The opti<strong>on</strong> of cut secti<strong>on</strong>s should then be c<strong>on</strong>sidered. A<br />

maximum of four point ends or fifteen IRJs (including boundary joints) per track<br />

circuit is str<strong>on</strong>gly recommended.<br />

13.6 Applicati<strong>on</strong>s of B<strong>on</strong>ding C<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Type of<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified<br />

Lines<br />

A.C. Electrified<br />

Lines<br />

D.C. Electrified<br />

Lines<br />

Plain Line DRDS or CR DRDS or SR DRDS or SR♣<br />

S & C DRSS * SR SR<br />

Complex<br />

S & C<br />

Figure D10<br />

Notes:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

CR # SR SR<br />

* Where DRDS is impracticable.<br />

# Where DRDS and DRSS are impracticable.<br />

♣ Maximum permitted length is 200m.<br />

13.7 IRJs Between Differing <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Types<br />

IRJs must be provided in both running rails at the point where differing track<br />

circuit types abut. Special cases will be discussed in the relevant secti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

13.8 IRJs at Signals<br />

Where a signal is replaced to danger by occupati<strong>on</strong> of the first track circuit<br />

ahead, the IRJs will generally be positi<strong>on</strong>ed between 5m - 20m bey<strong>on</strong>d the<br />

signal. For further informati<strong>on</strong> see SSP 62.<br />

13.9 Jointed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Abutting N<strong>on</strong>–track Circuited Line<br />

In order to detect defective IRJs where a jointed track circuit adjoins a n<strong>on</strong>–track<br />

circuited secti<strong>on</strong>, a short circuit b<strong>on</strong>d must be provided immediately bey<strong>on</strong>d the<br />

IRJs, as shown in Figure D11. This b<strong>on</strong>d shall be a standard b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–<br />

electrified lines, or a tracti<strong>on</strong> standard b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> electrified lines.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure D11<br />

AA<br />

13.10 IRJs at Electrified/N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Boundary<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D15 of 20<br />

13.10.1 Running Lines<br />

At the boundary between electrified and n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines, initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs<br />

must be provided in both running rails at a sufficient distance bey<strong>on</strong>d the end of<br />

the catenary/c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail to prevent an overrunning train from injecting tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

current into the rails <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side of the joints. The collector<br />

shoes <strong>on</strong> d.c. multiple units are interc<strong>on</strong>nected within each multiple unit set.<br />

Therefore, it is the length of the l<strong>on</strong>gest multiple unit which will dictate the<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs in d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas.<br />

All track circuits within 800m of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side<br />

must be immune to the tracti<strong>on</strong> system and provided with double rail IRJs.<br />

Where there are no track circuits <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong><br />

IRJs, a sec<strong>on</strong>d set of isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs must be provided in each rail 800m bey<strong>on</strong>d<br />

the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs.<br />

If any siding occurs within the above 800m areas, a sec<strong>on</strong>d set of isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs<br />

must be provided in each rail of the siding immediately clear of the running line.<br />

13.10.2 Sidings Off Electrified Lines<br />

In electrified tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, two sets of IRJs are to be provided in both rails at<br />

least 27m apart. These are to be provided bey<strong>on</strong>d the last track circuit in private<br />

sidings leading to stores or depots c<strong>on</strong>taining flammable or explosive<br />

substances, and in other sidings where isolati<strong>on</strong> from electric tracti<strong>on</strong> is required.<br />

In d.c. electrified areas, the tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding must be extended by the<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer <strong>on</strong>to track circuited n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and sidings<br />

for at least 120m bey<strong>on</strong>d the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail or the tips of the points. <strong>Track</strong><br />

circuits bey<strong>on</strong>d this distance must be fully isolated with double rail IRJ’s or the<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding must be c<strong>on</strong>tinued for at least another 335m. This<br />

ensures that an electric tracti<strong>on</strong> unit inadvertently entering a n<strong>on</strong>–electrified area<br />

will not lose its negative return whilst any shoe is still in c<strong>on</strong>tact with a c<strong>on</strong>ductor<br />

rail.<br />

On lines where Eurostar operati<strong>on</strong>s are authorised, the above distances will<br />

need to be extended accordingly.<br />

If the line c<strong>on</strong>cerned c<strong>on</strong>nects with a d.c. electrified line at more than <strong>on</strong>e point,<br />

it must have c<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding throughout in order to prevent tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

return current passing through the couplings of a train which is bridging two<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> porti<strong>on</strong>s of a siding.<br />

13.11 A.C. and D.C. Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Areas Abutting<br />

Where there is a requirement for inter–running with trains operating <strong>on</strong> differing<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> systems, IRJ separati<strong>on</strong> between the differing tracti<strong>on</strong> systems<br />

cannot generally be achieved. In these areas, a suitable “buffer” z<strong>on</strong>e of dual<br />

immunisati<strong>on</strong> must be provided.<br />

As a general guide, for track circuit applicati<strong>on</strong>s, immunisati<strong>on</strong> against 50Hz<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> should be maintained for a distance of 3km bey<strong>on</strong>d the extremity<br />

RAILTRACK D15


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D16 of 20<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

of the 50Hz system. Immunisati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits <strong>on</strong> the a.c. electrified system<br />

and n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines against d.c. interference, will usually involve significantly<br />

greater distances (up to 20 km).<br />

The extent of such a z<strong>on</strong>e is dependent up<strong>on</strong> track layout, positi<strong>on</strong> of feeder<br />

stati<strong>on</strong>s and tracti<strong>on</strong> load etc, and requires specialist assessment and<br />

subsequent verificati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

13.12 Buffer Stops<br />

Rail mounted buffer stops in double rail track circuited areas must be fully<br />

insulated. In the case of single rail track circuits in a.c. electrified territory, they<br />

should be insulated from the signal rail.<br />

The type of IRJ provided close to buffer stops must be of a design which offers<br />

similar tensile strength to c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al steel fishplates (see GK/RT0031).<br />

13.13 Electrical Stagger<br />

Where the electrical energy of <strong>on</strong>e track circuit is capable of operating the<br />

adjacent track circuit due to IRJ failure, the polarity (d.c.) or phase (a.c.) of each<br />

must be arranged so that they oppose rather than reinforce each other. The<br />

intent being that IRJ failure will not result in false operati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The following methods are available to counteract lack of proper electrical<br />

stagger:<br />

• Provide an additi<strong>on</strong>al transpositi<strong>on</strong> to restore correct electrical stagger.<br />

• Abut feed ends.<br />

• Provide a feed end relay (d.c. track circuits <strong>on</strong>ly).<br />

• C<strong>on</strong>vert <strong>on</strong>e track circuit to a n<strong>on</strong>–interfering form of energy.<br />

13.14 Fouling and Clearance Points<br />

Where tracks cross or diverge etc, it is necessary to define track circuit limit<br />

dimensi<strong>on</strong>s which ensure that traffic passing al<strong>on</strong>g <strong>on</strong>e route is not obstructed<br />

by vehicles standing <strong>on</strong> the other. The two critical dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are referred to as<br />

the fouling point and the clearance point, as shown in Figure D12.<br />

Figure D12<br />

1970mm (Between Running Edges)<br />

4880 MM<br />

Crossing Nose Fouling Point Clearance Point<br />

D16 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D17 of 20<br />

13.14.1 Fouling Point<br />

This is a positi<strong>on</strong> a short distance away from the point of running line divergence<br />

(crossing nose). Should any part of a vehicle <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e track be between the<br />

crossing nose and the fouling point, it will make physical c<strong>on</strong>tact with any<br />

vehicles passing <strong>on</strong> the other route.<br />

Where the angle of divergence is less than 45°, the fouling point occurs where<br />

the distance between the running edges of the two rails is 1970mm, measured<br />

at right angles from the track for which the fouling point is being determined.<br />

Where the angle of divergence is greater than 45°, the fouling point occurs at<br />

1970mm from the crossing nose, measured al<strong>on</strong>g the track for which the<br />

clearance point is being determined.<br />

In the case where tracks become parallel with a running edge separati<strong>on</strong> of less<br />

than 1970mm, the fouling point occurs where the tracks first become parallel.<br />

13.14.2 Clearance Point<br />

As track circuits detect the wheelsets of vehicles which are inboard of bodyshell<br />

limits, the boundary of any track circuit designed to give assurance of clear<br />

passage al<strong>on</strong>g the other route must be some distance bey<strong>on</strong>d the actual fouling<br />

point. This is defined as the clearance point.<br />

In the absence of protecting trap points, the clearance point is 4880mm further<br />

from the crossing nose than the fouling point. Where trap points are provided,<br />

the clearance point is defined as the switch tips of the trap points. In both<br />

cases, the IRJ defining the track circuit limit is positi<strong>on</strong>ed at the first suitable rail<br />

joint bey<strong>on</strong>d the clearance point. All clearance points shall be shown <strong>on</strong> the<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding plans.<br />

13.14.3 Minimum Length of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

To prevent a vehicle bridging a short track circuit and c<strong>on</strong>sequently providing a<br />

false clear c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>, the minimum length of a track circuit is 18.3m.<br />

13.14.4 Staggered IRJs<br />

Where practical, IRJs should be positi<strong>on</strong>ed in each rail so that they are opposite<br />

to each other. Where a physical stagger between opposite IRJs is unavoidable,<br />

the maximum physical stagger must not exceed 2.6m. This is the minimum<br />

wheelbase of vehicles which can work unattached.<br />

To ensure that motor bogies do not become insulated from the tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

path, the physical stagger for a signal rail overlap in electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas must<br />

not exceed 2.1m. On the Isle of Wight, vehicles used have smaller bogies and<br />

as such, the maximum physical stagger is reduced to 1.7m.<br />

In order to avoid loss of detecti<strong>on</strong> of a single car, four wheel vehicle, the<br />

permitted distance between inner joints of staggered pairs of IRJs must not be<br />

less than 11m, where the IRJs are staggered at a distance of less than 1.6m<br />

(the minimum bogie wheelbase). If however, either pair of IRJs are staggered at<br />

a distance greater than 1.6m, or provide a clearance point (see Clause 13.14.2),<br />

then the distance between inner joints of staggered pairs must be not less than<br />

the 18.3m minimum track circuit length.<br />

Note: When c<strong>on</strong>sulting other documents, care should be taken to ascertain<br />

whether “running edges” or “outside edges” of rails are being referred to.<br />

RAILTRACK D17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D18 of 20<br />

Notes <strong>on</strong> Figure D13:<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure D13 gives examples of the applicati<strong>on</strong> criteria for IRJs, the references<br />

being as follows:<br />

13.15 RJ Summary<br />

C Clearance for vehicle overhang. Not less than 4880mm from the fouling point to the IRJ.<br />

D Distance between inner joints of<br />

staggered pairs.<br />

E Distance between staggered<br />

pair and end of track circuit.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Not less than 11m if both of pairs staggered < 1.6m.<br />

Otherwise, not less than 18.3m.<br />

18.3m minimum.<br />

F Fouling point. 1970mm between running edges<br />

L Minimum effective length<br />

of track circuit.<br />

18.3m minimum<br />

S Physical Stagger 1.7m max: Isle of Wight lines <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

2.1m max: Signal rail overlap <strong>on</strong> electrified lines.<br />

2.6 max: Other cases.<br />

Figure D13<br />

D18 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

14 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Equipment<br />

Positi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

15 Layout and Wiring<br />

of Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Equipment<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D19 of 20<br />

13.16 Permanent Way Engineering C<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

The following should be c<strong>on</strong>sidered relative to IRJ provisi<strong>on</strong> in S & C as<br />

c<strong>on</strong>strained by permanent way engineering c<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s:<br />

• IRJs adjacent to cast crossings should be avoided wherever possible.<br />

• IRJs run over in the high speed route should be avoided as far as possible.<br />

• There should be a minimum distance of 200mm between chair or rail<br />

fastenings of opposite polarity/phase to reduce the probability of failures due<br />

to metallic litter, etc.<br />

With a view to obtaining the best possible performance, track circuit equipment<br />

should be positi<strong>on</strong>ed as close as practicably possible to the associated rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, and any maximum limits laid down in the individual track circuit<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s must not be exceeded. This also permits better communicati<strong>on</strong><br />

between technicians when working apart, undertaking drop shunt tests, etc.<br />

In tunnels and <strong>on</strong> viaducts, the feed and relay ends of a track circuit should be<br />

mounted in the same lineside apparatus housing, provided that no electrical<br />

parameters are infringed.<br />

If the design of track circuit is such that staff are not required to make<br />

adjustments (eg. HVI track circuits), the relay or receiver equipment may be<br />

grouped in equipment buildings provided that no electrical parameters are<br />

thereby infringed.<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> boxes may be provided if site c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s warrant. These must be<br />

shown <strong>on</strong> wiring diagrams, but are not required <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans unless they<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tain fuses or arresters.<br />

All relays should be mounted as near to the top of the lineside apparatus<br />

housing as possible.<br />

Tail cables are to be terminated at the bottom of the lineside apparatus housing<br />

in <strong>on</strong>e of the following manners, as appropriate:<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to the track fuse and link.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to the track fuses.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to two links.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to a surge arrestor.<br />

In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas where the lineside apparatus housing is remote from the<br />

track c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, the surge arrester (where provided) and track fuse must be<br />

located at the tail cable terminati<strong>on</strong>s nearest to the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Where special restricti<strong>on</strong>s apply to wiring and/or positi<strong>on</strong>ing of equipment, this<br />

must be clearly shown <strong>on</strong> all wiring/layout drawings, so that if any alterati<strong>on</strong>s are<br />

made at a later date, the restricti<strong>on</strong>s are readily apparent<br />

RAILTRACK D19


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D20 of 20<br />

16 Duplicate Rail<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

17 Communicati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Duplicate c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the rails are the preferred arrangement for all track<br />

circuits, except those which operate at audio frequencies (see the relevant<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s for further informati<strong>on</strong>).<br />

Where duplicate c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are used the method of wiring is as shown in Part<br />

E.<br />

It is desirable that communicati<strong>on</strong> circuits are available between the<br />

feed/transmitter and relay/receiver sites to facilitate setting up and fault<br />

finding.The communicati<strong>on</strong> circuits may be run in the same multicore cables as<br />

the feed, transmitter, relay or receiver circuits.<br />

At certain SSI installati<strong>on</strong>s, the data cables carry communicati<strong>on</strong> cores which<br />

may be used for this purpose.<br />

D20 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part E<br />

Comp<strong>on</strong>ents and Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E1 of 52<br />

This part explains the general comp<strong>on</strong>ents applicable to all track circuits.<br />

Comp<strong>on</strong>ents specific to a particular type of track circuit are listed in the relevant<br />

Approved Code of Practice within this handbook.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> procedures for individual track circuit types are detailed in the<br />

relevant Approved Code of Practice within this handbook.<br />

Note: The Catalogue Numbers shown within this document are not directly<br />

c<strong>on</strong>trolled by Railtrack and as such, will not be maintained and kept up to date.<br />

Although every effort has been made to ensure that these were correct at the<br />

time of publicati<strong>on</strong>, it is therefore recommended that your supplier is c<strong>on</strong>tacted<br />

and a check is made with regard to the accuracy of these catalogue numbers<br />

prior to use.<br />

The Signal Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails.<br />

b) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails of a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly electrified areas.<br />

c) The positi<strong>on</strong> of all IRJs.<br />

d) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

e) In a.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), all rail to<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s between impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong><br />

the same track.<br />

f) In dual and d.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), the<br />

resp<strong>on</strong>sibility for impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is subject to special<br />

arrangements between the Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers.<br />

g) All track circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

h) The insulati<strong>on</strong> of all rods c<strong>on</strong>nected to the rails and switches (eg. detecti<strong>on</strong>,<br />

facing point lock, point main drive and supplementary drives).<br />

The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) All rail joint b<strong>on</strong>ds in d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails.<br />

b) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails and<br />

between the centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds in different tracks.<br />

c) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes.<br />

d) All other permanent tracti<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

The Permanent Way Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) The insulati<strong>on</strong> of all point soleplates, tiebars and stretcher bars.<br />

b) The installati<strong>on</strong> of all IRJs.<br />

The requirements and resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for the installati<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> electrified<br />

lines are laid down in GM/TT0126 and GM/TT0129.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E2 of 52<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Interrupters<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The standard insulated track circuit interrupter assembly is shown <strong>on</strong> drawing<br />

BRS-SM 374, an extract of which is shown in Figure B11.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Assembly complete to BRS-SM 374 : 86/44001<br />

Taper pin, BRS-SM 411, 60mm : 86/44011<br />

Body unit to BRS-SM 375 : 86/44003<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong>s to BRS-SM 376 : 55/27570<br />

Item 1 Insulating bush : 55/25976<br />

Item 2 Insulating washer : 55/28981<br />

Item 3 Channel insulati<strong>on</strong> : 55/27201<br />

The interrupter is mounted <strong>on</strong> the stock rail, not the switch rail, by means of an<br />

M20 insulated bolt passing through a 28mm hole in the rail web. A sec<strong>on</strong>d<br />

28mm hole, 130mm from the first, may be provided to enable the wiring to be<br />

brought out towards the sleeper ends. The interrupter is positi<strong>on</strong>ed as near as<br />

possible to the switch toe, commensurate with maintaining a flangeway gap of<br />

not less than 70mm with the switch closed. Figure E1 gives the nominal<br />

positi<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

The temporary repair of track circuit interrupters by means of wrapping the cable<br />

around the stock rail is forbidden. Refer also to Part D.<br />

POSITION OF INTERRUPTER<br />

E 2 R A I L T R A C K<br />

A<br />

Rail Type Switch Type Dimensi<strong>on</strong> 'A'(mm)<br />

95 lb.Bullhead A 4180<br />

B 4780<br />

C 5900<br />

D 7620<br />

113 lb. Inclined A 4180<br />

B 4955<br />

C 6675<br />

D 7635<br />

E 10185<br />

113 lb. Vertical A 4705<br />

B 6125<br />

C 6835<br />

D 8255<br />

E 11095<br />

Figure E1


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E3 of 52<br />

4 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Boundaries Where required, a plate may be fixed to the sleepers or to the lineside track<br />

circuit equipment to assist identificati<strong>on</strong> of track circuit limits.<br />

5 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Cross <strong>Track</strong><br />

Cables<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Wherever a track circuit boundary occurs in a tunnel, a plate bearing the track<br />

circuit name or number must be fixed to the tunnel wall <strong>on</strong> each side of the IRJ<br />

(or equivalent in the case of a jointless track circuit).<br />

5.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

Cross track tail cables and jumpers should be protected from damage, eg. by<br />

means of orange plastic pipe. This protecti<strong>on</strong> need not be c<strong>on</strong>tinuous across the<br />

cess or six–foot, but should be used where tail cables pass under walkways.<br />

5.2 Orange Pipe Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Cut the pipes to length so that the ends are clear of the ballast shoulder. This<br />

helps to prevent ballast from entering. Restrict each pipe length to 3 metres<br />

maximum as l<strong>on</strong>g lengths of pipe will not move out of the way if struck by a<br />

tamper tine. However, in S & C areas it may be necessary to use l<strong>on</strong>ger lengths<br />

to give full protecti<strong>on</strong> across the sleeper bay. It is particularly important that the<br />

pipe is laid straight and centrally in the sleeper bay, and that holes for rail leads<br />

are as close to the rail as possible, in order to give maximum protecti<strong>on</strong> from<br />

tamping machines.<br />

Do not use the ballast to restrain sideways movement. Dig the pipe into a<br />

shallow depressi<strong>on</strong> in the ballast keep it visible but allow sideways movement if<br />

struck.<br />

Do not fill a pipe more than half full with cables. This reduces the chance of cable<br />

damage if the pipe is crushed by a tamper. If more cables have to be run,<br />

provide another pipe.<br />

Wherever possible, do not install a pipe in a sleeper bay adjacent to c<strong>on</strong>ductor<br />

rail ramped end to prevent the pipe being ignited by sparks from the collector<br />

shoe.<br />

To allow the Permanent Way Engineer maximum opportunity for tamping, do not<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> a pipe:<br />

• in a bay where there is a rail joint or weld, or in a bay adjacent to them;<br />

• in a bay which is less than 0.37 metres (1 foot 3 inches) wide, unless there<br />

is no other choice;<br />

• in a bay which already has an orange pipe or other obstructi<strong>on</strong>, or in <strong>on</strong>e<br />

adjacent to it. Always leave at least <strong>on</strong>e clear bay between obstructed bays.<br />

If a pipe needs side holes for the exit of track c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> cables:<br />

a) Cut the holes with a good quality 40 to 50 mm fixed diameter hole saw. Do<br />

not use other methods of making holes. Round off the sharp edges of the<br />

hole with a file or deburring tool.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E4 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

b) Clip the pipe to the foot of the outside of flat bottom rail. On bull-head rail a<br />

cab-lock round the pipe may be secured to the rail web with a taper pin.<br />

These fixings prevent the pipe rotating or moving al<strong>on</strong>g its length and cutting<br />

into the cable. The clip will still permit some sideways movement if the pipe is<br />

struck.<br />

c) Leave sufficient slack in the cable so that if the pipe does become detached<br />

from the rail, the c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not be pulled away. However, excessive<br />

amounts of slack cable should be avoided in order to minimise the likelihood<br />

of vandalism.<br />

Orange pipe must not be cut al<strong>on</strong>g its length unless special dispensati<strong>on</strong> has<br />

been given.<br />

Orange pipe must not be used in tunnels or other areas of restricted Ventilati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If the pipe does ignite, it is difficult to extinguish and gives off heavy fumes.<br />

Orange pipe is generally suitable as protecti<strong>on</strong> for crossing walkways if it is let<br />

into the surface. When tail cables need to be protected for other reas<strong>on</strong>s, such<br />

as chemical spillage in sidings or for staff safety, a c<strong>on</strong>crete route or under track<br />

buried crossing should be used.<br />

Catalogue numbers are given in clause E11.<br />

E 4 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E5 of 52<br />

Figure E2 shows the general arrangement for orange pipe installati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Leave some slack here<br />

to allow for minor slews.<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Orange pipe<br />

Cable strap<br />

(use as few as possible)<br />

No rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Orange pipe<br />

No rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Cable route<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E2<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E6 of 52<br />

6 Mechanised <strong>Track</strong><br />

Maintenance<br />

7 Rail Drilling<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

All equipment <strong>on</strong> the track must be installed clear of the tamping z<strong>on</strong>es indicated<br />

in Figure E3, except cross track orange pipe.<br />

All sleepers may be tamped, except those <strong>on</strong> either side of Silec treadles and<br />

point rodding.<br />

Figure E3<br />

E 6 R A I L T R A C K<br />

290<br />

405<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

For c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al grades of rail steel, Signal Engineers use rail drilling machines.<br />

They are preset to drill the two holes required accurately with no adjustment<br />

necessary. Available drilling machines and attachments, together with the<br />

Catalogue Numbers, are listed below:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, hand operated (single spindle) : 39/41822 *<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, 110V/500W (twin spindle) : 86/43690 #<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, petrol engine (twin spindle) : 39/41823 *<br />

S & C drilling attachment, for use with 39/41823 : 39/200000<br />

Flexible drive, 8 feet l<strong>on</strong>g, for use with 39/41823 : 39/54510<br />

Notes:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

* The drilling machine fits over the rail and cannot be left in positi<strong>on</strong> whilst<br />

trains pass.<br />

# The drilling machine clamps to the underside of the rail and can be left in<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> whilst trains pass.<br />

At sites of heavy wear, particularly in S & C, The Permanent Way Engineer may<br />

fit specially hardened steel rails which can <strong>on</strong>ly be drilled with special drill bits.<br />

Whilst the Permanent Way Engineer permits drilling of 7.2mm holes for taper<br />

pins by Signal Engineers, drilling of larger holes in hardened steel is a specialist<br />

job to be undertaken by Permanent Way Engineering staff.<br />

405<br />

290


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8 Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E7 of 52<br />

The following table of Permanent Way Engineer’s rail markings is included to<br />

assist staff in the identificati<strong>on</strong> of rail types. The brand marks appear as raised<br />

characters <strong>on</strong> the rail web; c<strong>on</strong>firmati<strong>on</strong> is also provided by paint marks <strong>on</strong> new<br />

rail and (in some cases) by its magnetic properties.<br />

Remarks:<br />

Figure E4<br />

Type Brand Mark Paint Marks Magnetic Remarks<br />

Normal N<strong>on</strong>e N<strong>on</strong>e Yes 1<br />

Wear resisting A A 2 blue Yes 1<br />

Wear resisting B B 3 blue Yes 1<br />

BSC 90 AA 1 blue/1 white Yes 1<br />

90kg chrome 1CR 1 red Yes 1<br />

100kg chrome 1CR 2 red Yes 1<br />

AMS HC Manganese 1 green No 2<br />

AMS LC Manganese W 1 green No 2<br />

MHT - - Yes 1&3<br />

1: Can be drilled using c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al methods.<br />

2: Can be drilled <strong>on</strong>ly with special tools/techniques.<br />

3: Identificati<strong>on</strong> not yet agreed.<br />

8.1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

The various methods of making electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the rail are explained<br />

below:<br />

8.2 Taper Pins<br />

The taper pin requires a 7.2mm hole, 57±2mm above the base of the rail, to be<br />

drilled through the rail. The taper pin c<strong>on</strong>sists of a threaded secti<strong>on</strong> to which the<br />

various c<strong>on</strong>nectors are attached, and a n<strong>on</strong>–threaded end which is tapered to<br />

ensure that the pin is firmly fixed to the rail.<br />

Fit the taper pins into the holes and hit the n<strong>on</strong>–threaded ends with a hammer to<br />

ensure that the pins and the rail are in electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit maintenance kit<br />

Comprising:<br />

: 88/10037<br />

Pin, taper, BRS-SM 411, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (10) : 86/44013<br />

Nut, self locking, stainless steel,M6 (10) : 3/179995<br />

Washer, stainless steel, M6 (20) : 3/190825<br />

Nut, stainless steel, M6 (10) : 3/175013<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 7


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E8 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8.3 Pin Brazing<br />

Pin brazing is a method of c<strong>on</strong>necting threaded pins to the rail using electric–arc<br />

brazing. This method will usually be used at new sites or where re–railing takes<br />

place and may be used <strong>on</strong> standard and hardened steel rails. Pin–brazed studs<br />

will be installed by Signal or Permanent Way Engineering staff; any pers<strong>on</strong><br />

engaged in these operati<strong>on</strong>s must hold a Certificate of Competency for the task<br />

to be undertaken.<br />

An M12 pin brazed stud may be brazed to the rail web, as shown in Figure E5.<br />

The minimum spacing between c<strong>on</strong>nectors is 85mm. The correct torque for<br />

attachment of the rail lug to the M12 studs is 60Nm.<br />

NOTE<br />

Self Locking Nut (Supplied) to be<br />

tightened to a torque of 60Nm<br />

200 240<br />

E 8 R A I L T R A C K<br />

115<br />

Pin Brazed TEE C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

Figure E5<br />

The threaded pins are brazed to the rail, at a positi<strong>on</strong> 57±2mm above the base<br />

of the rail, with a silver based filler metal, using a hand held brazing gun operated<br />

by either of the following pieces of equipment:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Portable machine, battery driven <strong>on</strong> single<br />

rail trolley, suitable for track maintenance,<br />

which will braze approx. 50 pins to the rail. : 20/3003<br />

Large machine, battery driven <strong>on</strong> double rail<br />

trolley. The batteries are recharged by an<br />

integral petrol driven generator. This unit has<br />

a capacity for 50 brazes per hour and is<br />

suitable for new works. : 20/3001<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E9 of 52<br />

Both of the above machines require the batteries and the brazing gun to be<br />

ordered separately. These are listed al<strong>on</strong>g with other spares and attachments<br />

as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

VF 2300 Brazing gun : 40/515<br />

VF 2300 Angled gun : 20/3021<br />

VF 2300 Extended gun : 20/3011<br />

VF 2300KA Brazing gun : 20/3010<br />

VFRG Batteries : 20/3002<br />

VFLC Batteries : 20/3004<br />

VFKA Batteries : 20/3007<br />

VFKA 250 Battery unit : 20/3005<br />

VFKA 250 Attache case : 20/3006<br />

Battery charger for vehicle : 20/3008<br />

Battery charger for depot : 20/3009<br />

8mm Ceramic ferrule : 55/27287<br />

9.5mm Ceramic ferrule : 55/16001<br />

8mm Brazing pin : 55/27706<br />

9.5mm Brazing pin : 55/41011<br />

Spark shield : 40/543<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact arm : 40/507<br />

12mm/M8 Pin holder : 40/561<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact set complete : 40/521<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact nipple and disc : 40/555<br />

Ejector rod complete : 40/536<br />

Key set : 40/520<br />

Screw set : 40/556<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 500mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 88/23906<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 145mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 88/23907<br />

Rail B<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 1500mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 86/43511<br />

T c<strong>on</strong>nector M12 : 55/9366<br />

<strong>Track</strong> end c<strong>on</strong>nector : 20/3013<br />

V C<strong>on</strong>nector 2 x 25mm x 90mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 46/2183<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E10 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8.4 Cembre<br />

Cembre is a method by which a copper bush is expanded inside a 22mm hole<br />

drilled into the rail web. A bolt is then passed through the copper bush and is<br />

used to fix a cable lug to the rail. The copper bush should be inserted and<br />

expanded a so<strong>on</strong> as the hole has been drilled. If this is not possible, the hole<br />

should be given a protective coating of jointing paste at the time of drilling and<br />

thoroughly cleaned, in the same manner a described for pin drive fittings when<br />

the bush is fitted. Refer to clause 8.6<br />

Cembre Parts Catalogue No.<br />

Rail lead installati<strong>on</strong> kit (M12 steel screw with hollow : 86/017025<br />

hex. head, flat steel washer & self locking nut)<br />

Copper bush for 22mm dia. hole : 86/017026<br />

Expansi<strong>on</strong> plunger. Calibrated high tensile steel : 86/017027<br />

Hydraulic tool with hand pump c/w carrying case : 86/017028<br />

Go/No Go gauge for checking 22mm rail hole : 86/017029<br />

To ensure that the drilled hole is the correct size a gauge is used as detailed<br />

below and shown in Figure E6 :<br />

a) Insert the Go/No Go gauge into the hole.<br />

b) The hole may be used <strong>on</strong>ly if the green part passes through and the red part<br />

does not.<br />

c) If the red part passes through, redrill a hole in a different positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

d) The inside of existing holes should be thoroughly cleaned and bright.<br />

Red (No GO Column)<br />

GO / No GO Column<br />

Figure E6<br />

Green (No GO Column)<br />

E 10 R A I L T R A C K<br />

22 Dia<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E11 of 52<br />

Once the drilled hole has passed the gauging test the following procedure is<br />

used to expand the copper bush :<br />

Refer to Figure E7.<br />

a) Insert the copper bush (Item A) into the rail web.<br />

b) Insert the calibrated plunger (Item B) <strong>on</strong> bush flange side, ensuring threaded<br />

end projects through to the other side.<br />

c) Depress the tool pressure discharge lever (Item C) to ensure the pist<strong>on</strong> is<br />

fully retracted.<br />

d) Insert the calibrated plunger (Item B) into threaded housing of either tool<br />

seating (Item D) by using gauge (Item E) located <strong>on</strong> hexag<strong>on</strong> end of item B.<br />

e) Pump until the calibrated plunger is completely through.<br />

Figure E7<br />

Running Edge<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 11<br />

C<br />

D<br />

A<br />

D<br />

B<br />

E


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E12 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

With reference to Figure E8, the general assembly procedure of the c<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

is as follows:<br />

a) Insert the hollow hexag<strong>on</strong>al headed stud into the copper bush so that the<br />

thread projects from the bush flange side (this will usually be into the four<br />

foot).<br />

b) The stud head will surround the projecting part of the bush without touching<br />

it. Locate lug <strong>on</strong>to the stud, add washer and lock nut, then tighten to 60Nm<br />

torque.<br />

Type AR 60-3 Steel Stud With<br />

Hollow Hex Head (M12)<br />

Figure E8<br />

Figure E9 shows a typical b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement.<br />

These dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

typical. Refer to Layout Drawing<br />

for individual situati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Figure E9<br />

Running Edge<br />

M12 Washer<br />

Cable Lug<br />

Self Locking Nut<br />

E 12 R A I L T R A C K<br />

240<br />

76<br />

NOTE;<br />

Self locking Nut (supplied)to be<br />

Tightened to a torque of 60 Nm.<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E13 of 52<br />

8.5 Aluminio–thermic Welding<br />

Thermic welding is a method of fixing threaded pins to the rail by means of a<br />

thermo–chemical reacti<strong>on</strong>. It can be used for tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding in both a.c. and<br />

d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas.<br />

Two types of studs are available:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

1<br />

/2 ” x 7 / ” fully threaded stud, complete with<br />

8<br />

nut and washers.<br />

5<br />

/8 ” stud with nut, spring washer and<br />

: Available from ERICO.<br />

flat washer. : 46/19800.<br />

Note (1): Aluminio–thermic welding is also referred to as Cadweld and<br />

Thermoweld.<br />

Note (2): Any pers<strong>on</strong> engaged in these operati<strong>on</strong>s must hold a Certificate of<br />

Competency for the task to be undertaken.<br />

8.6 Pin Drive<br />

This method should be used <strong>on</strong>ly where pin braze or Cembre fittings cannot be<br />

used.<br />

A bimetal rail lug (Railway Catalogue No. 55/27614) provides an aluminium barrel<br />

for crimping to aluminium cable and a copper lug for inserti<strong>on</strong> into the rail.<br />

Where pin–drive lugs are used to make c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the running rails, the<br />

22mm holes are drilled by Permanent Way Engineering staff. If the rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is not made at the time of drilling, the hole is immediately given a<br />

coating of jointing paste (Railway Catalogue No. 7/026200) to minimise the risk<br />

of a high resistance c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> due to corrosi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is made as follows:<br />

Before the lug is inserted in the rail, it is cleaned of all existing jointing paste and<br />

all c<strong>on</strong>tact surfaces should be clean, bright, brushed with a circular wire brush<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 5/4266) and re–coated with a uniform layer of jointing<br />

paste (Railway Catalogue No. 7/026200).<br />

The lug is secured to the rail by means of the rail lug b<strong>on</strong>d pin, refer to Figure<br />

E10. Pin size No.1 (Railway Catalogue No. 55/27860) , is driven in with a<br />

hammer and is used for the first installati<strong>on</strong>. Pin size No. 2 (Railway Catalogue<br />

No. 55/27862) is used for subsequent installati<strong>on</strong>s of a lug. Pin size No.3<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 55/27863) should be used <strong>on</strong>ly when the rail hole is<br />

oversize, eg. 7 / 8 ” rather than 22mm. After installati<strong>on</strong>, surplus jointing paste<br />

should be wiped off.<br />

All rail lug c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s should be inspected after installati<strong>on</strong> to ensure that the<br />

lug is tight and free from cracks. Any cracked or loose c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are to be<br />

remade.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 13


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E14 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

6R<br />

E 14 R A I L T R A C K<br />

41<br />

28<br />

2 x 45 O<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Pin Number Stamped Here Height 6<br />

Figure E10 shows the rail lug b<strong>on</strong>d pin.<br />

Material : Steel to BS 970 Part 1. 070 M20<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

‘X’<br />

0.13<br />

Figure E10<br />

8.7 The Preformed Moulded Rubber C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

The rail should have previously been fitted with two threaded studs by <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

methods described in 8.2 to 8.4.<br />

Secure the moulded c<strong>on</strong>nector <strong>on</strong>to the threaded studs using the self locking<br />

nuts and washers, tightened to a torque of 13 Nm, as shown in Figure E11.<br />

Ensure that the stud protrudes at least <strong>on</strong>e full turn through the nut. Do not fit a<br />

nut or washer between the rail and moulded c<strong>on</strong>nector.<br />

Fit the flange clip over the cable and push the clip <strong>on</strong>to the foot of the rail.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Flange Clip, 6.5mm BRS–SM 849 (1) 86/43489<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 2.5mm²<br />

3.0 metres : 86/44022<br />

4.5 metres : 86/44023<br />

6.5 metres : 86/44024<br />

8.0 metres : 86/44025<br />

30.0 metres : 86/44026


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Cable Terminati<strong>on</strong> Label<br />

TCABRB (1)<br />

Flange Clip<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E15 of 52<br />

Taper Pin<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Locking Nut<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 15<br />

76mm<br />

57 + 2mm<br />

Figure E11<br />

8.8 The “L” Plate C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

“L” Plate c<strong>on</strong>nectors are used <strong>on</strong>ly where preformed cables are inappropriate.<br />

The rail is drilled in accordance with Figure E12.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> kit : 86/44019<br />

Comprising:<br />

Pin, taper, BRS-SM 411, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (2) : 86/44013<br />

Nut, self locking, stainless steel, M6 (2) : 03/179995<br />

Washer, stainless steel, M6 (4) : 03/190825<br />

Nut, stainless steel, M6 (2) : 03/175013<br />

Plate, BRS-SM 848 (1) : 86/43488<br />

Terminal, crimped, black sleeve, M6 (1) : 54/119568<br />

Flange clip, 6.5mm, BRS–SM 849 (1) : 86/43489<br />

Tube, heat shrinkable, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (1) : 55/120989


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E16 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Flange clips may also be obtained for larger cable sizes:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Flange clip, 15mm, BRS–SM 849 (2) : 86/43498<br />

Aster and TI21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Flange clip, 23mm, BRS–SM 849 (3) : 86/43499<br />

Inductive Loop Reed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Cable Terminati<strong>on</strong> Label<br />

TCABRB (1)<br />

Flange<br />

Clip<br />

`L' Plate<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer & Locking Nut<br />

Heat Shrink Sleeve<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer & Nut<br />

E 16 R A I L T R A C K<br />

76mm<br />

Two Holes<br />

7.2 Dia.<br />

57 + 2mm<br />

Figure E12<br />

The rail should have previously been fitted with two threaded studs by <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

methods described in 8.2 to 8.4.<br />

Fit a washer and nut to each threaded stud and tighten to a torque of 13 Nm.<br />

Strip back 20mm of the outer sheath of the 2.5mm²(f) cable, followed by<br />

8 - 9mm of the inner sheath to expose the c<strong>on</strong>ductor.<br />

Slide the crimp terminal <strong>on</strong>to the cable and crimp it. Ensure that the crimping<br />

tool is the correct size, and matches the crimp terminal being used. The kit<br />

currently c<strong>on</strong>tains an AMP PIDG 6mm terminal, for which a yellow/black handled<br />

AMP tool (59239-4) must be used.<br />

Slide the heat–shrink sleeve <strong>on</strong>to the “L” plate and thread the cable through the<br />

sleeve until the eye of the crimp is over the end hole of the ‘‘L’’ plate.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E17 of 52<br />

Move the heat–shrink sleeve until the entire stripped length of the cable is<br />

covered by the sleeve without restricting the securing hole.<br />

Apply heat to the heat–shrink sleeve. Before heating, the sleeve is 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g,<br />

and reduces to about 50mm when it is fully heat–shrunk <strong>on</strong>to the cable and the<br />

plate.<br />

Place the “L” plate assembly <strong>on</strong>to the threaded studs and secure using the<br />

remaining washers and the self locking nuts, tightened to a torque of 13 Nm.<br />

Fit the flange clip over the cable and push the clip <strong>on</strong>to the rail.<br />

The typical arrangement of the track circuit disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box is shown in Figure<br />

E13. It is mounted <strong>on</strong> a stake using two M8 studs (supplied with the box) and<br />

comprises a moulded rubber back with a slide–<strong>on</strong> metal cover which can be<br />

padlocked using the standard RKB221 padlock. Provisi<strong>on</strong> is made to securely<br />

clamp both the lineside apparatus housing tail cables and track lead cables in the<br />

base of the box. A l<strong>on</strong>ger stake is available for use where ground c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s are<br />

poor.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Stake (Angle), 760mm l<strong>on</strong>g, to BRS-SM 104/13 :<br />

Catalogue No.<br />

86/10751<br />

Stake (Angle), 1070mm l<strong>on</strong>g to BRS-SM 104/11 : 86/88250<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box : 86/43877<br />

The terminati<strong>on</strong> for each track circuit comprises a four way 2BA link block. The<br />

various cables should be terminated as shown in Figure E14 (this enables the<br />

individual track leads of duplicated arrangements to be disc<strong>on</strong>nected/tested<br />

separately).<br />

Note 1: Only <strong>on</strong>e track circuit is allowed in a Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box and hence<br />

double track circuit boxes are not to be used.<br />

Note 2: Separate tail cables must be provided for each track circuit end.<br />

Note 3: Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

as defined in GO/RT3073.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E18 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure E13<br />

Figure E14<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Rail 2<br />

Duplicate<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Cable<br />

Tail<br />

Cable<br />

E 18 R A I L T R A C K<br />

Rail 2<br />

Lead<br />

To<br />

Lineside<br />

Apparatus<br />

Housing<br />

Rail 1<br />

Lead<br />

Rail 1<br />

Duplicate<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Cable


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10 Arrangement of<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Lead Rail<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(Except Jointless)<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

C<br />

D<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E19 of 52<br />

Figure E15 and Figure E16 show typical arrangements of rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

either side of an insulated joint. Figure E15 uses 90mm diameter orange pipe<br />

and is the preferred arrangement, except where the pipe is unable to be<br />

threaded under the rail, (eg. tunnels and other areas of restricted use). Figure<br />

E16 shows the alternative method where the cables are clipped to the top of the<br />

sleepers.<br />

In both cases, duplicated single core 2.5mm²(f) flexible cable, fitted with moulded<br />

rubber c<strong>on</strong>nectors, is the preferred arrangement to be used between the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box and the rail. It is terminated <strong>on</strong> the four foot side of the rail.<br />

Under no circumstances should the track leads of different track circuits share a<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Note Combining two track circuits into <strong>on</strong>e 4 core cable is not permitted.<br />

If required, in order to avoid vandalism, the disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box can be replaced<br />

by a heat–shrink jointing kit.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> lead arrangements for jointless track circuits are described in the relevant<br />

secti<strong>on</strong> dealing with the particular design.<br />

IRJ<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

w Y<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 19<br />

IRJ<br />

On n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines the first bay<br />

to be left clear<br />

Cable Route<br />

X<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E15<br />

Z


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E20 of 52<br />

A C<br />

B<br />

D<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

IRJ<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

IRJ<br />

On n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines the first bay<br />

to be left clear<br />

Cable Route<br />

E 20 R A I L T R A C K<br />

W<br />

X<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E16<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Pipe, Medium Density, Orange,<br />

6 metres x 90mm : 86/44141<br />

Clip, Pipe for 90mm o/d pipe : 86/44140<br />

Fastaway Clip, 6.5mm for 2.5mm²(f) cable : 86/43489<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 2.5mm²(f):<br />

3.0 metre : 86/44022<br />

4.5 metre : 86/44023<br />

6.5 metre : 86/44024<br />

8.0 metre : 86/44025<br />

30.0 metre : 86/44026<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit : 86/43877<br />

Stake for Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box 760mm L<strong>on</strong>g : 86/10751<br />

Stake for Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box 1070mm L<strong>on</strong>g : 86/10751<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 1 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² single : 54/15875<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 2 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² two core : 54/15873<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 2 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² single : 54/36101<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 4 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² two core : 54/36102<br />

Y<br />

Z


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E21 of 52<br />

The method and comp<strong>on</strong>ents described in this secti<strong>on</strong> are to be used to improve<br />

the reliability of the electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between pieces of rail which are already<br />

in casual electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact by virtue of their c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Whilst the most obvious item in this category is the n<strong>on</strong>–insulated fishplate type<br />

rail joint <strong>on</strong> all n<strong>on</strong>–electrified and a.c. electrified lines, this method of b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

extends to elements of S & C, such as crossings, wing rails etc, where the<br />

comp<strong>on</strong>ents are also bolted together without intervening insulati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

On d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines, it is to be used <strong>on</strong> the signal rail <strong>on</strong>ly of<br />

single rail track circuits. B<strong>on</strong>ding of fishplates in the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail of d.c.<br />

electrified railways is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

11.1 Standard Fishplate Arrangement<br />

Two 7.2mm holes, 76mm apart, are drilled through the rail web in the first<br />

sleeper bay each side of the joint. The holes should be 57 ±2mm above the<br />

base of the rail. The b<strong>on</strong>ds should generally be fitted <strong>on</strong> the four foot side of the<br />

rail using channel pins and run close to the base of the rail, as shown in Figure<br />

E17. The short exposed end of the b<strong>on</strong>d should be folded flat and hammered<br />

against the rail. B<strong>on</strong>ds should not be threaded through the fishplates or rail<br />

fastenings. In areas pr<strong>on</strong>e to vandalism the b<strong>on</strong>ds may be passed under the rail<br />

so that they are less vulnerable; when this is d<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong>e end of each b<strong>on</strong>d is<br />

attached to the inside of the rail and the other end to the outside. However,<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ds should not be passed to the outside of the rail if there is a c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail<br />

<strong>on</strong> that side.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d, solid steel, galvanised, 4.29mm x 1670mm : 86/44149<br />

Channel Pin to BRS-SE33 : 86/44012<br />

A<br />

Figure E17<br />

76<br />

B<br />

535<br />

57 ± 2mm<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 21<br />

535<br />

A<br />

76<br />

B<br />

Running Edge<br />

Channel Pin 7.2mm DIA. Hole<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E22 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11.2 Standard S&C Arrangements<br />

11.2.1 Switch/Stock Rail<br />

Figure E18<br />

Switch Rail<br />

Stock Rail<br />

11.2.2 Acute Fabricated Crossing<br />

E 22 R A I L T R A C K<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Parallel Wing Extensi<strong>on</strong><br />

Figure E19<br />

If a parallel wing is fitted, holes marked * should have b<strong>on</strong>d leads fitted prior to<br />

assembly of vee and before the parallel wing is attached. The leads should be<br />

tied al<strong>on</strong>g the rail to prevent damage in transit.<br />

11.2.3 Obtuse Fabricated Crossing<br />

Figure E20


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

12 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E23 of 52<br />

11.3 Fishplates in C<strong>on</strong>crete Bearer Pointwork<br />

Rail to rail fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding in c<strong>on</strong>crete bearer S & C should be achieved using<br />

the same techniques as specified for Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

11.4 Redundant Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Where redundant insulated rail joints cannot be avoided:<br />

a) In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer should be requested to<br />

install all temporary b<strong>on</strong>ds across IRJs which will carry Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return<br />

Current. If the b<strong>on</strong>d is to carry track circuit currents <strong>on</strong>ly, Galvanised Ir<strong>on</strong><br />

(GI) b<strong>on</strong>ds may be used and be fitted by the Signal Engineer.<br />

b) In a.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, if either side of an IRJ is a tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail, the<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer should install the temporary b<strong>on</strong>d, but if both sides<br />

of the IRJ are signal rails then standard fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds may be used as a<br />

temporary measure.<br />

c) In n<strong>on</strong>–electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, ordinary b<strong>on</strong>ds should be used.<br />

This secti<strong>on</strong> describes the comp<strong>on</strong>ents and installati<strong>on</strong> of jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

designed to carry track circuit currents <strong>on</strong>ly. Apart from special cases of<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, tracti<strong>on</strong> jumpers are the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Engineer. Refer to Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.<br />

12.1 Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This arrangement should be used <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and <strong>on</strong> the signal rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly of d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines. It should not be used for yellow<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding purposes.<br />

Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding uses the same single core cable as used for track<br />

terminati<strong>on</strong>s (GS/ES 0872 Type C1 2.5mm²(f)) terminated in the rail web, using<br />

either the “L” Plate c<strong>on</strong>nector or preformed moulded rubber c<strong>on</strong>nector.<br />

For cable lengths and catalogue numbers see 10.<br />

12.2 Yellow Standard B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ding uses GS/ES 0872, 35mm² cable, identified with a<br />

yellow sheath or a yellow sleeve at the terminati<strong>on</strong>. The b<strong>on</strong>ds are supplied in<br />

various lengths with a moulded rubber c<strong>on</strong>nector for c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rail at <strong>on</strong>e<br />

end and unterminated at the other. Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds should not be installed more<br />

than 20m apart.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 35mm² :<br />

3.0 metre : 86/44155<br />

4.5 metre : 86/44154<br />

6.5 metre : 86/44153<br />

8.0 metre : 86/44152<br />

30.0 metre : 86/44151<br />

Jointing Kit For Moulded Flexible TC<br />

Lead 35mm² : 54/037092<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 23


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E24 of 52<br />

13 High Voltages<br />

14 Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Wiring<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Fix warning signs (Figure E21) to all exposed track circuit capacitors and to the<br />

outside of lineside apparatus housings c<strong>on</strong>taining high voltage track circuit<br />

equipment.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

50mm wide : 56/144135<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

100mm wide : 56/144111<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

150mm wide : 56/144130<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”<br />

plastic laminate 300mm x 300mm : 56/144611<br />

Figure E21<br />

For general wiring procedures the appropriate Code of Practice should be<br />

c<strong>on</strong>sulted. Refer to Codes of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook for<br />

special cases.<br />

14.1 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of Terminals<br />

Terminals in lineside apparatus housings, dis. boxes, etc and impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

terminal boxes should be corrosi<strong>on</strong> proofed using Valvoline Tectyl 506<br />

(Catalogue No. 7/58553) as so<strong>on</strong> as wiring and testing are complete. Valvoline<br />

should not be applied to capacitor adjusting slides, fuse clips or end caps, or the<br />

windings of wire–wound resistors.<br />

E 24 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Manufacturer Style Freq.<br />

(Hz)<br />

Howells or<br />

WBS<br />

Howells or<br />

WBS<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E25 of 52<br />

15.1 Handling Precauti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

When transporting impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, they should be lifted <strong>on</strong>ly by the lifting lugs<br />

or at the defined lifting points. Under no circumstances should any weight be<br />

taken <strong>on</strong> the tracti<strong>on</strong> lead terminals or cable lugs as this can result in damage to<br />

the insulati<strong>on</strong>, allowing water to enter.<br />

Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds have positi<strong>on</strong>s for lifting lugs to be fitted, which should<br />

be removed as so<strong>on</strong> as the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d has been placed in the track and<br />

replaced with the supplied means of protecting the threads.<br />

15.2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Types and Restricti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Refer to the table in Figure E22<br />

Functi<strong>on</strong> Type Cat No Oil<br />

Filled<br />

Aux. Coil<br />

Ratio<br />

Weight<br />

(Kg)<br />

Supply<br />

WH3 50 Universal 3 86/17024 No 56: 1 160 N<br />

MR or<br />

S<br />

50 Universal 2 86/17023 No 56:1 160 O<br />

WBS P3 50 Universal 1 88/1237 Yes 45:1 S<br />

SGE DE 50 Universal I 88/83945 Yes 40:1 120 S<br />

WBS M 50/75 Specific 0 Yes 42:1 230 O<br />

WBS M2/5 50/75 Specific* 0 88/83948 Yes 42:1 190 S<br />

WBS M650/<br />

75<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Specific 0 88/83952 Yes 45:1 230 O<br />

SGE DD 50 Universal 0 Yes 42:1 230 O<br />

GRS B 50 Specific 0 Yes 45:1 O<br />

Figure E22<br />

The table in Figure E22 is interpreted as follows:<br />

Functi<strong>on</strong><br />

Universal<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds shown as ”Universal” may be used for all functi<strong>on</strong>s in all<br />

styles of track circuit approved for use in d.c. electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas,<br />

subject <strong>on</strong>ly to their ability to cope with the designed tracti<strong>on</strong> current load.<br />

Note: Saturati<strong>on</strong> levels and avoidance of particular combinati<strong>on</strong>s of b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

and track relay, should be c<strong>on</strong>sidered when replacing b<strong>on</strong>ds of <strong>on</strong>e style<br />

with another (see Clause 15.4).<br />

The impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are tuned to 50Hz. For other frequencies, internal<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ating capacitors are fitted.<br />

Specific<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds shown as ”Specific” are specially set or tuned to perform<br />

feed, relay or intermediate functi<strong>on</strong>s at a particular frequency. If, in an<br />

emergency, an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is required to perform a different functi<strong>on</strong><br />

or operate at the other frequency, it should be re–tuned.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 25


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E26 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

* WBS style M2/5 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds have been serviced as ”Universal”<br />

since 1984.<br />

Notes<br />

N. (New) - In producti<strong>on</strong> and serviced.<br />

S. (Serviced) - Out of producti<strong>on</strong>, but still serviced.<br />

O. (Obsolete) - Out of producti<strong>on</strong> and not serviced.<br />

Type<br />

All new impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are manufactured to specificati<strong>on</strong> BR863, the current<br />

rating of which is shown in Figure E23:<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Type <br />

Type 3 3000A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 4500A for 2 hours<br />

Type 2 2400A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 3600A for I hour<br />

Type I 950A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 1100A for I hour (Not to BR863)<br />

Type 0 (Not to BR863)<br />

Figure E23<br />

On high current dc. tracti<strong>on</strong> lines, ie. where classes 92, 373, 465 and 471<br />

locomotives and multiple units run in revenue–earning service, <strong>on</strong>ly Type 3<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds fitted with six side leads (three <strong>on</strong> each side) are to be used.<br />

On other lines, any type of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d may be used and need <strong>on</strong>ly be<br />

fitted with two side leads.<br />

15.3 Sleeper Spacing<br />

The sleeper spacing required for impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is shown in Figure E24.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Style Type Sleeper Centres (mm)<br />

WH3 3 650*<br />

MR or S 2 750**<br />

P3 1 635<br />

DE 1 585<br />

M 0 700<br />

M2/5 0 700<br />

M6 0 700<br />

DD 0 725<br />

B 0 710<br />

Figure E24<br />

* The fixing centres for Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is 650mm. However, any<br />

spacing between 570mm and 730mm will be satisfactory as the<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is not fixed down at the terminal box end (see Figure<br />

E26).<br />

* * S and MR impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are also <strong>on</strong>ly fixed at <strong>on</strong>e end, therefore the<br />

spacing of the sleepers is not critical<br />

E 26 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E27 of 52<br />

15.4 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Interchangeability<br />

When an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is changed for another type, it is usually necessary to<br />

change some or all of the associated c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. Figure E25 is included as a<br />

guide to the items affected. The preferred replacement is shown shaded.<br />

As well as physical interchangeability, the replacement b<strong>on</strong>d will need to be<br />

sufficiently rated for the peak and c<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> currents that occur <strong>on</strong> that<br />

line.<br />

Imbalance in tracti<strong>on</strong> return currents will tend to apply a proporti<strong>on</strong> of any<br />

interference c<strong>on</strong>tent to track circuit receivers, which under particular c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

could lead to a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure. One mechanism whereby imbalance is<br />

detected, is due to saturati<strong>on</strong> of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds. As the difference<br />

between the tracti<strong>on</strong> currents flowing through the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d’s half<br />

windings increase, the transformer acti<strong>on</strong> of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d becomes less<br />

efficient as it is driven into saturati<strong>on</strong>, thereby suppressing the track circuit<br />

voltage. The operati<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit will become unreliable, but some<br />

protecti<strong>on</strong> against wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure of the track circuit is provided.<br />

The level of imbalance current required to saturate impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is roughly<br />

proporti<strong>on</strong>al to their rating, with higher rated type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds able to withstand<br />

greater imbalance current levels than type 2 b<strong>on</strong>ds for example. This saturati<strong>on</strong><br />

of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds leading to right side failure of the track circuit, can provide<br />

useful protecti<strong>on</strong> against wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure due to tracti<strong>on</strong> interference.<br />

Therefore, care should be applied when replacing <strong>on</strong>e type of b<strong>on</strong>d for another,<br />

as the tolerance to imbalance may be increased, but at the expense of detecti<strong>on</strong><br />

of situati<strong>on</strong>s where track circuits become exposed to tracti<strong>on</strong> interference which<br />

could lead to wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure.<br />

Additi<strong>on</strong>ally, certain b<strong>on</strong>d/relay combinati<strong>on</strong>s should be avoided as they may<br />

create problems in correctly setting up 50Hz a.c. double rail track circuits. In<br />

particular, G4 relays should not be used with type 2 or type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds. If the track<br />

relay is a style CE391, the recommended replacement impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is style<br />

DE, but if this is not available, it will usually be necessary to change the relay and<br />

base to a VT1. It is also recommended that the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d at the other<br />

end of the track circuit is changed in order to get a satisfactory adjustment,<br />

particularly if a style B impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is being displaced.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 27


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E28 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

TABLE OF IMPEDANCE BOND INTERCHANGEABILITY<br />

Old<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Comp<strong>on</strong>ent New Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

WH3 P3 DE M2/5<br />

Side leads C E T C<br />

MR Plate C C C C<br />

Tail cable E J J J<br />

Side leads E C C T<br />

S Plate C C C C<br />

Tail cable E J J J<br />

Side leads C E C T<br />

P3 Plate D E D C<br />

Tail cable R E R J<br />

Side leads E C E T<br />

DE Plate D D E D<br />

Tail cable R R E J<br />

Side leads C T C T<br />

M Plate D C C E<br />

Tail cable R E R E<br />

Side leads C C C E<br />

M2/5 Plate D D D E<br />

Tail cable R R R E<br />

Side leads C C C E<br />

M6 Plate D D D E<br />

Tail cable R R R E<br />

Side leads C C C T<br />

DD Plate D C C D<br />

Tail cable R E E E<br />

Side leads C C C T<br />

B Plate D C C T<br />

Tail cable R R J J<br />

Legend<br />

E Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent can be re–used.<br />

C Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent to be changed.<br />

T Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent can be used temporarily.<br />

D Existing re–drilled and/or cut<br />

J Joint required.<br />

R Re–use (may be jointed using kit, Railway Catalogue No S411S289.<br />

Figure E25<br />

E 28 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E29 of 52<br />

15.5 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Spares and Repairs<br />

Maintenance and local stock holding will generally be made easier if different<br />

styles of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are not intermixed within a track circuit.<br />

Surplus and defective impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds should be returned intact to the local<br />

Infrastructure Store for servicing. New or re–serviced impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

available to order from the stores organisati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

In an emergency, ie. if a possessi<strong>on</strong> or a replacement impedance b<strong>on</strong>d cannot<br />

be obtained, replacement of faulty parts may be carried out in–situ in some<br />

cases. The following spare parts are available. Railway catalogue numbers are<br />

given where applicable:<br />

15.5.1 Style WH3<br />

Not repairable.<br />

15.5.2 Style MR<br />

Obsolete, parts out of producti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

15.5.3 Style S<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Terminal box (CD1073) : 86/43866<br />

Terminal block (WBS Drg B41464/1) : N/A<br />

Terminal label (WBS Drg J14676/– : N/A<br />

Cable gland 25mm (Hawke type 300 P25) : N/A<br />

Cable gland 20mm : 54/109127<br />

Blanking grommet 25mm (RS605–677) : N/A<br />

Blanking grommet 20mm (RS 605–661) : N/A<br />

Resilient mounting : 86/117018<br />

15.5.4 Style P3<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, universal : 88/49566<br />

Covers, main : 88/84009<br />

Covers, terminal box : 88/84010<br />

Gasket, main cover : 88/84011<br />

Gasket, terminal box cover : 88/84012<br />

Plate lug centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> : 88/27761<br />

Seal rubber, side lead A/57117/1 : 88/26415<br />

Terminal assy. CD.1055/S : 88/84013<br />

15.5.5 Style DE<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary (2BA lugs) : 88/2308<br />

Coil, auxiliary (OBA lugs) D4/21048A : 88/84038<br />

Cover, main : 88/84039<br />

Cover, terminal box : 88/84040<br />

Gasket main cover : 88/84041<br />

Gasket terminal box cover : 88/84042<br />

15.5.6 Style M<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary, feed or relay : 88/83976<br />

Coil, auxiliary, res<strong>on</strong>ated : 88/2321<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 29


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E30 of 52<br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15.5.7 Style M2/5<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, c<strong>on</strong>denser : 88/26065<br />

Plate, lug, steel (pairs with screws)<br />

for fitting side c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s : 88/83987<br />

15.5.8 Style M6<br />

Obsolete, parts out of producti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

15.5.9 Style DD<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary : 88/83553<br />

Gasket, main cover : 88/27047<br />

15.5.10 Style B<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil auxiliary : 88/83958<br />

Terminal box : 88/25802<br />

Cover, terminal box : 88/83959<br />

15.5.11 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> Spares<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Sealing Compound Red Hermabte no. 5400 : 7/60180<br />

Oil, insulating (impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds) 2.5 litre : 27/13802<br />

CAUTION: Care should be taken to avoid trapping fingers when handling<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

16.1 Type 3 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds supplied to BR863 have blanking plates, grommets or<br />

plastic plugs in the terminal box holes, together with <strong>on</strong>e M25 gland, for 2c Type<br />

C2 2.5mm²(f) and four M20 glands, for single core Type C1 2. 5mm²(f).<br />

The impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is also supplied with resilient mountings, either fitted or<br />

supplied separately. The resilient mounting feet comprise two porti<strong>on</strong>s and, if<br />

not already fitted, should be glued together using Araldite Rapide or Araldite<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 7/103330).<br />

The cable glands should be fitted as required and the internal lock nuts glued<br />

with Araldite. If unused holes are fitted with plastic plugs, these should be<br />

replaced with threaded blanking plates. Surplus blanking plates, grommets and<br />

glands should be retained as spares.<br />

In instances where the auxiliary coil box is pr<strong>on</strong>e to water accumulati<strong>on</strong>, a 3mm<br />

hole may be carefully drilled in the bottom of the terminal box and all swarf<br />

cleared away.<br />

The b<strong>on</strong>d is now ready for installati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete or wooden<br />

sleepers (Howells or WBS Style WH3) are shown in Figure E26, Figure E27<br />

and Figure E28.<br />

E 30 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

CL<br />

200<br />

200<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E31 of 52<br />

After installati<strong>on</strong>, it is particularly important to ensure that all glands are securely<br />

tightened <strong>on</strong>to the cables and that all unused entry holes are properly sealed.<br />

This will reduce the incidence of failures resulting from an accumulati<strong>on</strong> of brake<br />

dust <strong>on</strong> the terminal block and tuning capacitor.<br />

Debris exclusi<strong>on</strong> covers should be fitted to Type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds:<br />

For WBS WH3 Railway Catalogue No 86/17030<br />

For Howells WH3 Railway Catalogue No 86/17031<br />

Note Under no circumstances may a b<strong>on</strong>d be commissi<strong>on</strong>ed unless all glands<br />

are correctly fitted and any unused holes are fitted with a threaded<br />

blanking plate.<br />

For drilling of holes in c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers/bearers, see GK/RC0754 Part D.<br />

Figure E26 shows the Typical Pin Brazed Arrangement for the Type 3<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Arrangement This Side of IRJ To Be Used For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Not Secured To<br />

sleeper At This End<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

85 240<br />

85<br />

85 240<br />

200<br />

85<br />

200<br />

Cable Lugs Secured <strong>on</strong> Top<br />

of B<strong>on</strong>d Lug<br />

Holes for Temporary<br />

Jumpers When Required<br />

Cable Lugs Secured<br />

Underside of B<strong>on</strong>d Lug<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 31<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Arrangement<br />

This Side of IRJ<br />

See Figure E27 & Figure E28<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For securing b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers drill <strong>on</strong> centre line at 400 ctrs 12 dia and secure with Hilti heavy duty<br />

anchors HSA 12x 110 Hilti code 66337 (2 OFF). For wooden sleepers use coach screws 5/8" x 6".<br />

Catalogue No 35/13950. Screws not to be driven fully home but left approximately 25 above b<strong>on</strong>d lugs.<br />

Figure E26


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E32 of 52<br />

Arrangement This<br />

Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double<br />

Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Arrangement This<br />

Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double<br />

Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

I.R.J.<br />

I.R.J.<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E27 shows the Busbar Pin Brazed C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for Plain Line/L<strong>on</strong>g<br />

Switch Fr<strong>on</strong>ts.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used For<br />

Double/Single Layouts<br />

Figure E27<br />

200<br />

200<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

E 32 R A I L T R A C K<br />

155<br />

240<br />

155<br />

240<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

See Figure E43<br />

200<br />

200<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

Figure E27 shows the Busbar Pin Brazed C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for Short Switch Fr<strong>on</strong>ts.<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

I.R.J.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used For<br />

Double/Single Layouts<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

Figure E28<br />

S S<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

155<br />

240<br />

155<br />

240<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

See Figure E43<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Not Secured To<br />

sleeper At This End<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

S S<br />

Plastic Pipe<br />

Type 2 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E33 of 52<br />

16.2 Type 2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 2 (Style MR or S) impedance<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete or wooden sleepers are shown in Figure E28 and Figure<br />

E29.<br />

Arrangement This Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single & Double/Double Layout For<br />

Type 2 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

This Drawing Should Only Be Used For<br />

Renewal of Individual Comp<strong>on</strong>ents in<br />

Existing Installati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear<br />

of Tamping<br />

Z<strong>on</strong>es see Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 33<br />

I.R.J.<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single Layouts<br />

S S<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

see Figure E43<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For securing b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers drill <strong>on</strong> centre line at 400 ctrs 12 dia and secure with Hilti heavy duty<br />

anchors HSA 12x 110 Hilti code 66337 (2 OFF). For wooden sleepers use coach screws 5/8" x 6".<br />

Catalogue No 35/13950. Screws not to be driven fully home but left approximately 25 above b<strong>on</strong>d lugs.<br />

Figure E29


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E34 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16.3 Type 1 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 1 (Style P3 or DE) b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

shown in Figure E30 and Figure E31. On timber sleepers, the b<strong>on</strong>d should be<br />

fixed using 6” x 5/8” coach screws (railway cat no: 35/13950). Approximately<br />

25mm clearance between the b<strong>on</strong>d fixing lug and the underside of the coach<br />

screw is required to allow settlement of the sleepers without causing the b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

fixing lugs to come under strain. For installati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, see<br />

Figure E36.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E30<br />

Figure E31<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

200<br />

P3<br />

585 CRS<br />

E 34 R A I L T R A C K<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

76<br />

D.E.<br />

585 CRS<br />

200<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E35 of 52<br />

16.4 Type 0 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for a Type 0 (Style B, DD, M, M2, M5 or<br />

M6) b<strong>on</strong>d is shown in Figure E32, Figure E33, Figure E34 & Figure E35 . On<br />

timber sleepers, the b<strong>on</strong>d should be fixed using 6” x 5/8” coach screws (Railway<br />

Catalogue No: 35/13950). Approximately 25mm clearance between the b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

fixing lug and the underside of the coach screw is required to allow settlement of<br />

the sleepers without causing the b<strong>on</strong>d fixing lugs to come under strain. For<br />

installati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, see Figure E36.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E32<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

<br />

Timber Timber<br />

710 CRS<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 35<br />

76<br />

B<br />

200<br />

Timber Timber<br />

DD<br />

710 CRS<br />

200<br />

76


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E36 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E34<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E35<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Timber Timber<br />

200<br />

585 CRS<br />

E 36 R A I L T R A C K<br />

`M'<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

M2. M5.<br />

700 CRS<br />

200<br />

16.5 C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleeper Fixing Arrangements<br />

The fixing of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds to c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers/bearers requires the<br />

sleeper/bearer to be drilled off centre. This problem is overcome by using<br />

adjustable fixing straps (see Figure E36). Signal Engineering staff are permitted<br />

to drill holes in c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, however, these may <strong>on</strong>ly be drilled <strong>on</strong> the<br />

centre line of the sleeper. If c<strong>on</strong>crete bearers are required to be drilled, prior<br />

agreement should be obtained from the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

76


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17 Aluminium Busbars<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

400<br />

Figure E36<br />

Sleeper Drilled 18 <strong>on</strong> Centre Line X 95 Deep (Min) Metal<br />

Anchor HSL M12/25 Hilti Code 6692 2 Off<br />

M20 X 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex. Hd. Screw<br />

Sleeper Not To Be Drilled<br />

Typical Arrangement if Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Fixing to C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E37 of 52<br />

3 X 45 degree Chamfer<br />

40 65<br />

140<br />

3 Fillet Weld<br />

7.5 Radius<br />

All Dimensi<strong>on</strong>s in mm<br />

16.6 Safety Labelling<br />

Warning labels as described in Secti<strong>on</strong> 14 should be fitted to the outside of the<br />

auxiliary coil terminal box cover.<br />

17.1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

The various layouts and installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements of aluminium busbars are<br />

shown <strong>on</strong> the drawings as described below:<br />

Inter–track circuit c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are shown in Figure E37 and Figure E38. Details<br />

of busbar lengths and Railway Catalogue Nos. are given in Figure E39, Figure<br />

E40, Figure E41 and Figure E42.<br />

Busbar drillings for c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the b<strong>on</strong>d and rail side leads are shown in<br />

Figure E28, Figure E29 and Figure E39.<br />

Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are fitted with down–set busbars. Details can be found<br />

in Figure E37, Figure E38, Figure E39 and Figure E40.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> details of the aluminium busbars are shown in Figure E26, Figure<br />

E27, Figure E28, Figure E29 and Figure E43.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> of the busbar to earlier types of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is shown in Figure<br />

E32, Figure E33, Figure E34 and Figure E35.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 37<br />

Ø 16<br />

18<br />

30<br />

12<br />

"<br />

40<br />

"


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E38 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17.2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Lug Plates<br />

In the case of the Style P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d, the busbar is not secured directly to<br />

the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lug plate as with all other impedance b<strong>on</strong>d types. A<br />

separate lug plate (Railway Catalogue No. 88/27761) is required, as shown in<br />

Figure E44. This is secured to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lugs with four 1¼” x 3 /8”<br />

hexag<strong>on</strong> headed BSW bolts, plain spring washers and nuts, which are provided<br />

with the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

17.3 Packing Pieces<br />

The arrangement of packing pieces required between busbar and sleeper is<br />

shown in Figure E29. The packing pieces are illustrated in Figure E45. They are<br />

not attached to the sleepers but secured to the busbar using No.10 x 1¼” wood<br />

screws.<br />

17.4 Busbar Restrictor<br />

The busbar is maintained in positi<strong>on</strong> by a busbar restrictor arrangement. This<br />

comprises a pair of side stops (Railway Catalogue No 88/27760) as shown in<br />

Figure E46. The side stops incorporate a steel rod assembly to prevent<br />

excessive vertical movement. Installati<strong>on</strong> of the busbar restrictor is shown in<br />

Figure E43.<br />

17.5 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Arrangements<br />

Figure E37 shows the various c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> arrangements to be applied to Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds installed in new<br />

works. C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for maintenance replacement of other types of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are shown in Figure 38.<br />

E 38 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Notes<br />

*<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack CablesB<br />

2 For details of all busbars see Figure E39.<br />

Item 1<br />

DOUBLE RAIL TRACK CIRCUIT TO NO TRACK CIRCUITED LINES<br />

T.P. Huts Neg Return B<br />

Item 3<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

4 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return cable sizes : A = 240mm2 Aluminium B = 800mm2 Aluminium<br />

5 Where TI.21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> rail b<strong>on</strong>ds require to share the first sleeper bay with the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable,<br />

they must be taped to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable. Orange pipe must not be used<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

T.P Hut Neg Return A Neg Reinforcing CableB<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 5<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites.<br />

1 All lugs complete with bolts, nuts and washers for negative cross b<strong>on</strong>ding substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. hut<br />

cable attached to busbar to be supplied and fitted by Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

3 For full details of layouts see Figure E26, Figure E27, Figure E28.<br />

6 The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers lugs to be attached to the top of the busbar (Figure E55 for marking jig).<br />

7 Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds at substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. Huts to be sited in co-operati<strong>on</strong> with the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

8 In all layouts a l<strong>on</strong>ger busbar may be provided where necessary to accommodate reinforcing cables.<br />

* Cross track orange plastic pipe for protecti<strong>on</strong> of signalling cables.<br />

*<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E39 of 52<br />

* *<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong> Neg ReturnB<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 39<br />

Item 4<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

N.B. This Arrangement is Also Used at Sites Other Than Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Item 2<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong> Neg Returns<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Item 6<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

At Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

T.P. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

B<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Neg Reinforcing Cable<br />

See Note 9<br />

B<br />

T.P. Hut<br />

B<br />

Neg Return<br />

Intertrack CablesA<br />

Item 7<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E40 of 52<br />

Notes<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Item 1<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to N<strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> Circuited Lines<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

T.P Hut Neg Return A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 3<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

T.P. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites.<br />

1 All lugs complete with bolts, nuts and washers for negative cross b<strong>on</strong>ding substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. hut<br />

cable attached to busbar to be supplied and fitted by Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

2 For details of all busbars see Figure E39.<br />

3 For full details of layouts see Figure E27, Figure E28.<br />

*<br />

*<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Intertrack<br />

Cables<br />

4 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return cable sizes : A = 240mm2 Aluminium B = 800mm2 Aluminium<br />

5 Where TI.21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> rail b<strong>on</strong>ds require to share the first sleeper bay with the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable,<br />

they must be taped to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable. Orange pipe must not be used.<br />

*<br />

T.P. Huts Neg Return A<br />

* *<br />

Intertrack Cable A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

at Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

E 40 R A I L T R A C K<br />

B<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

6 The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers lugs to be attached to the top of the busbar (See Figure E55 for marking jig).<br />

7 Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds at substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. Huts to be sited in co-operati<strong>on</strong> with the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

8 In all layouts a l<strong>on</strong>ger busbar may be provided where necessary to accommodate reinforcing cables.<br />

* Cross track orange plastic pipe for protecti<strong>on</strong> of signalling cables.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

Intertrack Cables B Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

Neg Returns B<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

Neg Returns<br />

B<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

T.P. Hut<br />

Neg Returns<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 5 Item 6 Item 7<br />

Figure E38 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Arrangements (Other than<br />

Type 3)<br />

Item 2<br />

Item 4<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d T.p. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

B


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17.6 Busbar Details and Layouts<br />

Figure E39 shows busbar drilling layouts.<br />

2 Holes 12 Dia<br />

B<br />

Figure E39<br />

P3<br />

M6<br />

WH3 or MR<br />

15<br />

15<br />

11<br />

11<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

15<br />

15<br />

6 Holes 12 Dia<br />

100<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

4 Holes 14 Dia<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E41 of 52<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 41<br />

55<br />

55<br />

50<br />

55<br />

44.5<br />

51<br />

45<br />

25<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

19<br />

76<br />

25<br />

44.5<br />

75<br />

20<br />

M,M2,M5<br />

15<br />

15<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

DE<br />

DD<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

4 Holes 14 Dia<br />

55 44.5<br />

100<br />

100<br />

50<br />

19<br />

44.5<br />

50 19<br />

57<br />

41<br />

25<br />

35<br />

38<br />

35<br />

22


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E42 of 52<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E40 gives details of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar and drilling layouts.<br />

20<br />

75<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

45<br />

Material<br />

E 42 R A I L T R A C K<br />

#<br />

#<br />

4000<br />

Before Bending<br />

100<br />

800<br />

Before Bending<br />

100<br />

Aluminum Plate 150mm X 6mm to BS 2898(E1) In 4 Metre Lengths to<br />

Railway Catalogue No 88/24804<br />

5 Metre Lengths are Available to Railway Catalogue No 88/24805<br />

Holes Marked # are for Temporary Side Lead C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Figure E40<br />

#<br />

#<br />

220 45 20<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

150 100<br />

220<br />

45 o<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

75 R<br />

75 R<br />

45<br />

150 100<br />

45 o<br />

20<br />

75<br />

90<br />

75<br />

90


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E43 of 52<br />

Figure E41 shows the layout of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbars.<br />

Busbar Joint<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Busbars: One L<strong>on</strong>g ( Drill and cut as required) and <strong>on</strong>e short<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Busbar: One L<strong>on</strong>g (Cut flush with sleeper edge if required)<br />

Busbar: One Short<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure E41<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 43


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E44 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The layout of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is shown in Figure<br />

E42<br />

Note<br />

4 x M16 x 50 LG Hex. HD Bolts<br />

4 x M16 Self Locking Nuts. EZP.<br />

Recommended Torque 90Nm<br />

8 X M16 Washers<br />

E 44 R A I L T R A C K<br />

20 Min<br />

50 Max<br />

1 Ensure all Mating Surfaces are Wire Brushed Thoroughly and Coated With<br />

Electrolytic Paste (Catalogue No 7/262001) Before Assembly<br />

2 This Drawing to be Read in C<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> With Figure E40 & Figure E41<br />

Figure E42<br />

The busbar restrictor assembly is shown in Figure E43.<br />

2 X 6mm Starlock Push On Fasteners Uncapped Finish EZP.<br />

6 Dia Rod X 180 L<strong>on</strong>g Steel BS970.070 M20<br />

Busbar See Fig 14<br />

Busbar Packing Planed Deal<br />

Size 150 X 75 X 35<br />

Busbar Side Stops<br />

to be Fitted to all<br />

Busbars Which Extend<br />

Bey<strong>on</strong>d the Sec<strong>on</strong>d +<br />

Sleeper Bed from B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Except Where a<br />

Double/Double Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Occurs Side Stops Secured:<br />

To Timber Sleepers by No 12 X 2" Woodscrews<br />

To C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Drill Sleeper <strong>on</strong> Centre Line<br />

5/16" Dia X 2" Deep Insert Nyl<strong>on</strong> Rawlplug M8.96.008.<br />

Locate Side Stop. Hammer in Steel Round Head Zinc<br />

Plated Drive Screw 14 Gauge X 40mm Through 1/4"<br />

Phosphorus Br<strong>on</strong>ze Serrated Lock Washer.<br />

Figure E43


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E45 of 52<br />

Figure E44 shows the lug plate for style P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

Figure E44<br />

= =<br />

41 41<br />

41<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Busbar Packing (Railway Catalogue No. 88/27772) is shown in<br />

Figure E45.<br />

150<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 45<br />

270<br />

248<br />

75 32<br />

Material Planed Deal, End Grain To T<br />

Figure E45<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar side stop details are shown in Figure E46.<br />

42<br />

50<br />

Figure E46<br />

50<br />

2 Holes 08 Dia<br />

T<br />

30 50<br />

11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E46 of 52<br />

18 Side Leads<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

18.1 Side Lead Manufacture<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d and busbar side leads are manufactured in accordance with<br />

Figure E47 & Figure E48 and the tables in Figure E49, Figure E50 & Figure<br />

E51.<br />

Figure E47 shows the general procedure in diagrammatically form:<br />

45<br />

1. Strip Back Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

2. Crimp Lugs<br />

3. Fit heat shrink tube<br />

(where required) and label<br />

37/2.25 Aluminium Cable<br />

Catalogue No 6/116601<br />

Heat Shrink Tube with Sealant<br />

Catalogue No 55/118332<br />

E 46 R A I L T R A C K<br />

45<br />

OR<br />

Clear heat shrink tube to completely cover adhesive<br />

paper label. For colour of label, legend and Railway<br />

Catalogue No see Figure E48, Figure E49,<br />

Figure E50 and Figure E51.<br />

Label size 50 x 20 nom fitted this end <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

Figure E47<br />

Figure E48 gives cable lengths (dimensi<strong>on</strong> A) for crimped lug and busbar<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. It should be used in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> with the cables in Figure E49,<br />

Figure E50 and Figure E51 which give details for each group of cables (green,<br />

white or orange group) according to the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

A<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E47 of 52<br />

B H or E B H or E C A<br />

Item 1<br />

Item 2<br />

Item 3 / 4<br />

A<br />

A A<br />

A<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

A<br />

D A or E D<br />

Item 6<br />

A or E D A or E<br />

Item 7<br />

Item 5<br />

A<br />

D A or E F A or E D A or E<br />

Item 8 Item 9 Item 10<br />

C A or E G H or E G<br />

Item 11/12<br />

Item 13/14<br />

E<br />

Item 15<br />

A A A<br />

Note The relative positi<strong>on</strong> of the lugs is different <strong>on</strong> items 1 & 2, 5 & 6, 7 & 8<br />

and 9 & 10.<br />

Cable End C<strong>on</strong>nectors are listed below with the (former) Southern Regi<strong>on</strong> Drawing No.<br />

and Railway Catalogue No.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>nector Type SR Drawing No Catalogue No.<br />

A Rail Lug 50° (Pin Drive) ME72-86 55/27630<br />

B B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (P3) ME72-88 55/27629<br />

C B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (DD & DE) ME72-92 55/27626<br />

D B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (M, M2, 5 & 6) ME72-89 55/27627<br />

E Rail Lug (Stud Fixing) 20° M39-34/1 54/39307<br />

F B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (B) ME72-91 55/27625<br />

G BusBar and B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (S, MR & Type 3) ME72-107 55/27631<br />

H Rail Lug 20° (Pin Drive) M39-34/2 55/27614<br />

Figure E48<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 47<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E48 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E49 gives details of Green Group Cables (For C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to Cembre<br />

Studs).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Green Label Legend Catalogue<br />

No.<br />

Length<br />

(mm)<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to M12 Stud Top 88/29464 715 B & E<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29463 715 B & E<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Busbar to M12 Stud L<strong>on</strong>g 88/29462 # C & E<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Busbar to M12 Stud Short 88/29461 # C & E<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to M12 Stud Top 88/29460 # D & E<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29459 # D & E<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Top 88/29458 685 D & E<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29457 660 D & E<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to M12 Stud Top 88/29456 # F & E<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29455 # F & E<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to M12 Stud 88/29454 # C & E<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to M12 Stud 88/29453 # C & E<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to M12 Stud 88/29452 740 G & E<br />

14 Busbar to Rail Busbar to M12 Stud 88/29451 800 G & E<br />

15 Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to M12 Stud 88/29450 740 G & E<br />

Figure E49<br />

Figure E50 gives details of White Group Cables (For C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to Pin Brazed<br />

Studs).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> White Label Legend Catalogue No Length<br />

(mm) (<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to M12 Stud Top 88/29477 665 B & E<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29476 665 B & E<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Not Required Install as Item 14 N/A N/A N/A<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Not Required Install as Item 14 N/A N/A N/A<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to M12 Stud Top 88/29475 # D & E<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29474 # D & E<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Top 88/29473 # D & E<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29472 # D & E<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to M12 Stud Top 88/29471 # F & E<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29470 # F & E<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to M12 Stud 88/29469 # C & E<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to M12 Stud 88/29468 # C & E<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to M12 Stud 88/29467 # G & E<br />

14 Busbar to Rail Busbar to M12 Stud 88/29466 725 G & E<br />

15 Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to M12 Stud 88/29465 665 G & E<br />

# Size not determined<br />

Figure E50<br />

E 48 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E49 of 52<br />

Figure E51 gives details of Orange Group Cables (For Pin Drive C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s).<br />

Note Orange Group cables are shown for reference <strong>on</strong>ly – preferred rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is by 12mm dia. stud (pin brazed or Cembre).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Orange Label Legend Catalogue<br />

No<br />

Length<br />

(mm)<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to Pin Drive Top 88/29477 765 B & H<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29476 715 B & H<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Busbar to Pin Drive L<strong>on</strong>g N/A 1070 C & A<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Busbar to Pin Drive Short N/A 690 C & A<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to Pin Drive Top 88/29475 765 D & D<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29474 715 D & D<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to Pin Drive Top 88/29473 685 D & A<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29472 660 D & A<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to Pin Drive Top 88/29471 690 F & A<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29470 690 F & A<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to Pin Drive 88/29469 765 C & A<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to Pin Drive 88/29468 485 C & A<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to Pin Drive 88/29467 740 G & A<br />

14 Busbar to Pin Drive Busbar to Pin Drive 88/27723 800 G & H<br />

Figure E51<br />

18.2 Side Lead C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

In order to minimise imbalance of tracti<strong>on</strong> return current in the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> coil, every attempt should be made to ensure electrical balance of the<br />

two sets of rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. Only aluminium c<strong>on</strong>ductors<br />

should be used. Copper and aluminium side leads should not be mixed <strong>on</strong> the<br />

same impedance b<strong>on</strong>d as they have different characteristics and the b<strong>on</strong>d will<br />

become unbalanced.<br />

When a Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is used at a site requiring <strong>on</strong>ly two side leads<br />

these should be c<strong>on</strong>nected to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lugs using the two holes<br />

nearest to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d casing. At all sites where the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

lugs are at different heights, the side lead c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the higher lug must be<br />

fixed to the underside of the lug.<br />

If <strong>on</strong>ly the side leads <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e side of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are renewed, the<br />

balance should be checked afterwards, as the new <strong>on</strong>es may have been<br />

installed with a high resistance or the existing leads <strong>on</strong> the other side may not be<br />

as good as the new <strong>on</strong>es.<br />

Before any c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to the aluminium plate, any burrs or<br />

protrusi<strong>on</strong>s should be removed from the mating surfaces of the plate, lug,<br />

washers and nuts. A wire brush or steel wool should then be used to make<br />

these surfaces clean and bright.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 49


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E50 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

All c<strong>on</strong>tact surfaces should be coated with a uniform layer of jointing paste<br />

(Catalogue No. 7/26200) immediately after cleaning and any surplus cleaned<br />

away after tightening. The paste prevents moisture filling the resultant air<br />

spaces between the dissimilar metal surfaces, preventing corrosi<strong>on</strong> which occurs<br />

very rapidly, particularly when aluminium is exposed to air or moisture.<br />

Where screw and nut c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to aluminium plate, eg. the<br />

aluminium busbar or P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lug plate, it is essential that<br />

mechanical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are not over-tightened. This is because aluminium<br />

displays the property known as ‘‘cold flow” under pressure and if a certain<br />

pressure is exceeded, a flow away from the pressure area occurs and the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> becomes loose, resulting in a high resistance c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Details of side lead/busbar c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and torque values are shown in the<br />

tables in Figure E52 and Figure E53.<br />

Where possible, the side lead c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s should be tested, using a millivolt<br />

meter in accordance with GK/RC0754 Part G.<br />

Figure E52<br />

Type<br />

of Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Type Of C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Busbar(Item) Side lead (Item)<br />

Type 3 D E<br />

MR D E<br />

B A C<br />

M A A<br />

P3 A C<br />

DE A B<br />

DD A A<br />

S D E<br />

Item Descripti<strong>on</strong> Torque Setting Catalogue No.<br />

A M12 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP 30Nm 35/101102<br />

B M12 x 70 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/101142<br />

M12 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

30Nm<br />

03/180167<br />

M12 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190932<br />

C M10 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/100842<br />

M10 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

16Nm<br />

03/180166<br />

M10 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190930<br />

D M16 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP 60Nm 35/101272<br />

E M16 x 70 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/101312<br />

M16 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

60Nm<br />

03/180168<br />

M16 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190936<br />

Figure E53<br />

E 50 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E51 of 52<br />

A label with the legend ”TRACTION VOLTAGE DO NOT REMOVE THIS LEAD”<br />

(see Figure E54) should be attached to or al<strong>on</strong>gside all impedance b<strong>on</strong>d leads<br />

at substati<strong>on</strong>s, TP huts and TIR sites. These cables are identified <strong>on</strong> the<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Plan as described in GK/RC0754 Part C.<br />

TRACTION VOLTAGE<br />

DO NOT REMOVE<br />

Red Lettering <strong>on</strong> White Background<br />

Figure E54<br />

THIS LEAD<br />

18.3 Side Lead Removal<br />

An insulated b<strong>on</strong>d punch (Railway Catalogue No. 39/48850) is available and<br />

should be used for the removal of side leads from the rail where they are pinned<br />

in 22mm or 7 /8” holes. This punch may be used adjacent to the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail<br />

provided the Railway Group Standard Code of Practice is adhered to.<br />

To prevent arcing whilst side leads are being removed or rec<strong>on</strong>nected,<br />

particularly where bolted stud c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s exist, a temporary jumper of a size<br />

equivalent to the side lead being removed, should be c<strong>on</strong>nected between the<br />

aluminium plate and the rail c<strong>on</strong>cerned before the last lead is disc<strong>on</strong>nected.<br />

If the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d side lead is identified by a label as shown in Figure E54,<br />

it can <strong>on</strong>ly be disc<strong>on</strong>nected under an absolute electric tracti<strong>on</strong> isolati<strong>on</strong> and in<br />

accordance with GK/RC0754 Part D.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 51


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E52 of 52<br />

19 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Negative<br />

Return Jumpers<br />

50 mm<br />

50 mm<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

These are supplied by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer and are c<strong>on</strong>nected to the<br />

aluminium busbar by Signal Engineering staff in accordance with GK/RC0754<br />

Part D. A marking jig (see Figure E55) should be utilised for marking out the<br />

busbar for drilling.<br />

16.5 mm<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

NOTES<br />

63.5mm<br />

191.0mm<br />

To Be Suitably<br />

Drilled and Riveted<br />

E 52 R A I L T R A C K<br />

63.5mm<br />

20mm<br />

5 0<br />

150 mm<br />

4 Holes at 17.5 mm Dia.<br />

150 mm<br />

1. Material is aluminium plate 150 x 6 (Off cut from impedance<br />

b<strong>on</strong>d busbar.)<br />

2. Remove all burrs and sharp edges.<br />

3. Jig must be located in the centre of the bed.<br />

4. This jig is for marking out <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

Figure E55<br />

A label with the legend ”TRACTION VOLTAGE DO NOT REMOVE THIS LEAD”<br />

(see Figure E54) should be attached to negative return jumpers at substati<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

TP Huts and TIR sites. Such leads may be disc<strong>on</strong>nected <strong>on</strong>ly under an absolute<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> isolati<strong>on</strong> and in accordance with GK/RC0754 Part G.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Multi–meters<br />

3 The Universal<br />

Shunt Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F1 of 5<br />

Part F<br />

Instrumentati<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> and Use<br />

This secti<strong>on</strong> gives details of the tools and instrumentati<strong>on</strong> available for general<br />

use <strong>on</strong> track circuits.<br />

Instruments designed to be used with particular designs of track circuit can be<br />

found in the relevant Code of Practice within the track Circuit Handbook.<br />

2.1 Types<br />

In general, both analogue and digital multi–meters can be used when testing<br />

track circuits.<br />

Analogue Meters:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Lineman’s AVO HD6 : 86/11001<br />

(No l<strong>on</strong>ger available)<br />

Digital Meters:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Megger Instruments M2006 : 40/56003<br />

Carrying Case : 40/56016<br />

Test Lead Kit : 40/17758<br />

Digital meters will usually require a loading resistor of 150kΩ (Catalogue No.<br />

86/11041) fitted to the meter to ensure that a load current is drawn when used<br />

<strong>on</strong> voltage tests.<br />

3.1 Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Various designs of track circuit shunt box have been produced over the years,<br />

some early designs being incapable of coping with the power dissipati<strong>on</strong><br />

requirements when shunting higher powered track circuits. The <strong>on</strong>ly design<br />

described in this handbook is the current standard design, which is suitable for<br />

use <strong>on</strong> all track circuit designs (Figure F1).<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Universal <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Shunt Box : 40/5450)<br />

Figure F1<br />

R A I L T R A C K F1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F2 of 5<br />

4 Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Tester<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The shunt box has two resistance selecti<strong>on</strong> dials: 0 - 9Ω and 0 - 0.9Ω which are<br />

additive to give a combined range of 0 - 9.9Ω in 0.1Ω steps. In order to avoid<br />

overheating when left c<strong>on</strong>nected, the selected resistance is <strong>on</strong>ly placed between<br />

the test leads when the butt<strong>on</strong> is pressed.<br />

The unit comes complete with c<strong>on</strong>necting leads fitted with 4mm plugs, and with<br />

two rail clamps for making attachment to the rail foot. These clamps have upper<br />

and lower c<strong>on</strong>tact points and should be attached to a secti<strong>on</strong> of cleaned rail foot<br />

without over tightening. The c<strong>on</strong>tact points should be replaced if they become<br />

blunt.<br />

3.2 Drop Shunt Test<br />

Test:<br />

1 C<strong>on</strong>nect the shunt box across the rails at the relay end of the track circuit.<br />

2 To ensure that the clamps make a good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with the rails,<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nect a voltmeter between the rail heads. With zero ohms set <strong>on</strong> the<br />

shunt box and the butt<strong>on</strong> or switch operated, ensure the rail to rail voltage<br />

falls to zero.<br />

3 Set the shunt box to maximum resistance.<br />

4 Whilst keeping the butt<strong>on</strong> depressed, steadily reduce the resistance value<br />

until the track relay fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts are fully open and remain open. The value<br />

of drop shunt can then be read directly from the shunt box. The following<br />

points should be borne in mind:<br />

a) <strong>Track</strong> circuits do not react instantly to changes in shunt value and time<br />

should be allowed for the relay to resp<strong>on</strong>d (2-3 sec<strong>on</strong>ds is adequate).<br />

b) It is obviously impractical to start at 9.9Ω and reduce in 0.1Ω steps at 3<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>d intervals. Do a preliminary test by setting the 0 - 0.9Ω selector to<br />

0Ω and stepping down the 0 - 9Ω selector to identify the approximate<br />

value. Set the 0 - 0.9Ω selector to 0.9Ω and step down to obtain the<br />

exact value.<br />

For example, if the relay drops at 1.0Ω <strong>on</strong> the preliminary test, the actual<br />

value lies between 1.0Ω - 1.9Ω.<br />

3.3 Pick–up Shunt Test<br />

Test:<br />

1 C<strong>on</strong>nect the shunt box as for the drop shunt test and set both resistance<br />

selector switches to 0Ω..<br />

2 Whilst keeping the butt<strong>on</strong> depressed, steadily increase the resistance value<br />

until the track relay fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts just close. The value of pick–up shunt can<br />

then be read directly from the shunt box (as for the Drop Shunt Test, similar<br />

techniques of delayed stepping and preliminary approximati<strong>on</strong> should be<br />

used).<br />

The vast majority of c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepered track comprises a resilient insulating pad<br />

between the underside of the rail and the sleeper, with the rail secured <strong>on</strong> each<br />

side by a clip bearing <strong>on</strong> the rail foot. Insulati<strong>on</strong> is maintained by plastic pads<br />

between the clip and the rail foot.<br />

F2 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F3 of 5<br />

Vibrati<strong>on</strong> causes the clip to wear through the pad, putting the rail in electrical<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact with the c<strong>on</strong>crete, which degrades the ballast resistance, and, if the<br />

track circuit is d.c. operated, may increase the levels of residual voltage. The<br />

degradati<strong>on</strong> occurs gradually and identificati<strong>on</strong> of the failed insulati<strong>on</strong>s can be<br />

difficult.<br />

The Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester, sometimes known as “PRIT” or “K9”, c<strong>on</strong>sists of<br />

a unit with an extending handle, which can be rolled al<strong>on</strong>g the rail head (see<br />

Figure F2). Metal brushes mounted <strong>on</strong> each side “sweep” the rail clips,<br />

measuring the rail to clip insulati<strong>on</strong>. Low values are indicated by an audible<br />

alarm.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester : 40/17741<br />

4.1 Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, the machine must not be used <strong>on</strong> the rail adjacent to the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail unless an isolati<strong>on</strong> has been obtained. The brushes must be fully<br />

retracted and the insulated brush guards fitted before lifting over c<strong>on</strong>ductor rails.<br />

Figure F2<br />

4.1.1 Preparati<strong>on</strong><br />

Set the brushes to the correct height.<br />

The unit is equipped with “<strong>on</strong>/off” and “polarity change” switches <strong>on</strong> the chassis<br />

and “test” and “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the handle.<br />

Switch “<strong>on</strong>” and set the “polarity change” switch to +ve.<br />

Press the “test” butt<strong>on</strong>, note the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous alarm t<strong>on</strong>e and then silence it by<br />

pressing the “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If no alarm is given, or if the alarm sounds <strong>on</strong>ly when the “test” butt<strong>on</strong> is<br />

depressed, the battery should be replaced with type PP9 or equivalent and the<br />

unit re–checked.<br />

4.1.2 Use<br />

Push the unit al<strong>on</strong>g the rail.<br />

When an alarm is received, press the “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong> and check by re–<br />

sweeping the suspect fastening. Turn the “change polarity” switch to -ve and<br />

re–sweep: If an alarm is received, the clip is faulty; if there is no alarm, the clip<br />

<strong>on</strong> the other rail is suspect.<br />

R A I L T R A C K F3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F4 of 5<br />

5 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault<br />

Detector<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The clip assembly should then be plainly marked for attenti<strong>on</strong> by the Permanent<br />

Way Engineer.<br />

The brush carriers can be raised/lowered to cater for flat or Pandrol type rail<br />

clips by moving the brush carrier handle to its vertical positi<strong>on</strong> to release the<br />

locking mechanism.<br />

Care must be taken to ensure that the rollers of the unit do not straddle any<br />

IRJs, causing “flicking” of adjacent track circuits.<br />

Short circuits between the rails can be difficult to locate, since, except for audio<br />

frequency types, the short circuit results in an identical drop in rail voltage al<strong>on</strong>g<br />

the length of the track circuit and gives no clue as to its physical locati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Without the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector, it would often be necessary to sub–<br />

divide the trackwork to locate the faulty secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The detector is designed to be used <strong>on</strong> the trackwork of a track circuit where the<br />

feed and relay have been disc<strong>on</strong>nected. It c<strong>on</strong>sists of two portable battery<br />

powered units: a transmitter and a receiver.<br />

Transmitter This is housed in a box incorporating an “<strong>on</strong>/off” switch and an LED<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong>. Yellow leads with clips are provided to c<strong>on</strong>nect the unit<br />

across the rails or lineside apparatus housing links. It is battery<br />

powered and outputs an intermittent high frequency voltage.<br />

Receiver This is housed in a box incorporating an “<strong>on</strong>/off” switch and an LED<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong>. It is battery powered and incorporates an internal aerial,<br />

amplifier and loudspeaker. When the receiver detects a signal<br />

from the transmitter it outputs an audible t<strong>on</strong>e.<br />

Before commencing to test the b<strong>on</strong>ding of a track circuit, the track circuit fault<br />

detector should be checked as follows:<br />

a) The transmitter leads should be c<strong>on</strong>nected together and the transmitter<br />

switched <strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) The receiver should then be switched <strong>on</strong> and held near the transmitter leads;<br />

an audible t<strong>on</strong>e should be heard emitting from the receiver (this simple test<br />

will prove that the fault detector is working correctly).<br />

c) The feed and relay ends of the track circuit under test should be<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected. With jointless track circuits, the track circuits either side of the<br />

track circuit under test should also be shorted out.<br />

d) The transmitter should then be c<strong>on</strong>nected across the rails at the feed end<br />

and switched <strong>on</strong>. The receiver is switched <strong>on</strong> and held near the rail; an<br />

audible t<strong>on</strong>e should be heard emitting from the receiver. No t<strong>on</strong>e may<br />

indicate a bad c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rails. If the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are good, the<br />

fault is an open circuit, which may be found in the c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al manner. If an<br />

audible t<strong>on</strong>e is heard, the receiver should then be carried al<strong>on</strong>g the track<br />

near to the rail and when the receiver passes the short circuit, a distinct drop<br />

in the volume of the t<strong>on</strong>e will be noted.<br />

F4 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

6 Mark 4 Direct Reading<br />

Phase Angle Meter<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F5 of 5<br />

e) With audio frequency track circuits it may not be necessary to disc<strong>on</strong>nect the<br />

feed, as the receiver will detect the steady t<strong>on</strong>e of the feed frequency until<br />

the short circuit is passed. If this method does not prove successful, the<br />

transmitter should be used in the c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al manner.<br />

f) The rail impedance limits the useful range of the device (as measured from<br />

the transmitter). Where this occurs, the transmitter is simply moved to<br />

another positi<strong>on</strong> within the track circuit and the test repeated.<br />

Details are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RC0757 Part E.<br />

R A I L T R A C K F5


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 High Voltages<br />

3 Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

4 B<strong>on</strong>ding Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part G<br />

Testing and Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G1 of 3<br />

The requirements for testing and commissi<strong>on</strong>ing of track circuits are detailed in<br />

the following:<br />

New Works : GK/RH 0730<br />

Maintenance/Fault Finding : GK/RH 0740<br />

Details of available instrumentati<strong>on</strong> and its uses are given in Part F.<br />

This Part details the general requirements for testing and commissi<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

Reference should also be made to the Testing & Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing Part of the<br />

Code of Practice for the particular track circuit design involved.<br />

Ensure that warning signs (Figure E21) are fixed to all exposed track circuit<br />

capacitors and to the outside of lineside apparatus housings c<strong>on</strong>taining high<br />

voltage track circuit equipment.<br />

Details of the warning signs can be found in Part E.<br />

Check that:<br />

a) All track equipment is of the correct type, as specified in the wiring diagrams,<br />

and that applicable pin code c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s are correct.<br />

b) All equipment is correctly labelled.<br />

c) There are no prohibited combinati<strong>on</strong>s of adjoining or parallel types of track<br />

circuits.<br />

d) There are no prohibited track circuit equipment combinati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

e) A wire count is carried out <strong>on</strong> all terminati<strong>on</strong>s, and the wiring proved correct.<br />

Check that:<br />

a) The physical positi<strong>on</strong>s of all IRJs or track ends are correct, especially those<br />

defining overlaps or clearance points.<br />

b) The physical stagger between nominally opposite IRJs does not exceed the<br />

permissible dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, and that no sub–secti<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit is shorter<br />

than the permitted minimum.<br />

c) All rail b<strong>on</strong>ds, rail jumpers, tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds, track circuit interrupters and track<br />

feed/relay cables are in accordance with the b<strong>on</strong>ding plan and scheme plan,<br />

and are secure.<br />

R A I L T R A C K G1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G2 of 3<br />

5 IRJ Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

6 Performance Test<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5.1 Testing of IRJs<br />

IRJs should be visually checked for indicati<strong>on</strong>s of insulati<strong>on</strong> deteriorati<strong>on</strong>, general<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> and rail burring over the insulati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If an IRJ is suspect, a possessi<strong>on</strong> of the track circuits c<strong>on</strong>cerned should be<br />

obtained and the IRJ tested for insulati<strong>on</strong> break–down with the track circuits<br />

taken out of service. The metallic comp<strong>on</strong>ents of the IRJ being tested should be<br />

cleaned to allow a good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with the test leads. If the insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

resistance between either plate and rail is less than 2kΩ at 50V, thew joint is<br />

likely to fail or has partially failed and requires attenti<strong>on</strong>. The Engineering<br />

Supervisor should be notified so that arrangements can be made with the<br />

Permanent Way Engineer to replace the faulty IRJ.<br />

In the case of d.c. track circuits, IRJ’s may be tested with the track circuits in<br />

service under certain c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. This procedure is described in GK/RC0755<br />

Part F.<br />

5.2 Prefabricated IRJs<br />

Edil<strong>on</strong> and similar prefabricated IRJs must be tested with a 50V insulati<strong>on</strong> tester<br />

prior to installati<strong>on</strong> in the track, taking care that the IRJ assembly is not in<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact with any c<strong>on</strong>ducting surface.<br />

Test:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

a) Between the two rails.<br />

b) Between both fishplates and the two rails.<br />

c) Between each bolt and the two rails.<br />

The minimum acceptable reading is 500kΩ..<br />

a) The track circuit should be energised and adjusted in accordance with the<br />

relevant secti<strong>on</strong> in this handbook. If difficulties are experienced, refer to the<br />

Fault Finding Procedures.<br />

b) Ensure that the polarity/phase is correct and that the correct electrical<br />

stagger is achieved.<br />

c) <strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupters must be tested by disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

d) Ensure that all adjoining track circuits are energised. Remove the feed links<br />

of the track circuit under test to check that <strong>on</strong>ly the correct track relay or<br />

relays resp<strong>on</strong>d. Check that any remaining extraneous voltage <strong>on</strong> the track<br />

relay does not exceed that permitted for the particular track circuit design<br />

(see the Testing & Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing Part in the Code of Practice for the<br />

relevant track circuit).<br />

e) Set the shunt box to the minimum permitted drop shunt value, and apply<br />

sequentially at all extremities and at selected places within any S & C, to<br />

prove the functi<strong>on</strong>ality of the track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding; the correct track relay<br />

must be seen to drop each time. For jointless track circuits, prove that the<br />

theoretical extremities are the actual extremities.<br />

G2 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G3 of 3<br />

f) Carry out a corresp<strong>on</strong>dence test between the rails of each track circuit and<br />

any indicati<strong>on</strong>s or to the final TPR, where no indicati<strong>on</strong>s are provided.<br />

A track circuit must not be commissi<strong>on</strong>ed until the pers<strong>on</strong> in charge of S&T work<br />

is satisfied that the rail surface is sufficiently free of rust and other c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong><br />

to ensure correct shunting.<br />

R A I L T R A C K G3


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong><br />

3 Drop Shunt Test<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part H<br />

Maintenance<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page H1 of 2<br />

This Part is a general guide to the principles of track circuit maintenance.<br />

Procedures specific to a particular design of track circuit are given in the relevant<br />

Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook.<br />

Instructi<strong>on</strong>s regarding maintenance of track circuits are given in GK/RH0740 and<br />

GK/RC0241.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit maintenance can be classified into the following activities:<br />

a) Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) Drop Shunt Test.<br />

c) Full Test.<br />

The objective of the examinati<strong>on</strong> is to find/remove potential failures and to<br />

ensure that, as far as possible, the track circuit will functi<strong>on</strong> satisfactorily until the<br />

next examinati<strong>on</strong>. The examinati<strong>on</strong> is mainly visual and can be undertaken<br />

without any need for possessi<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit.<br />

Any obstructi<strong>on</strong>s or c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s likely to prove detrimental to the reliability of the<br />

track circuit must be dealt with as so<strong>on</strong> as possible.<br />

The requirements and resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for maintenance and inspecti<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

are laid down in GM/TT0127 and GM/TT0128. Refer also to GK/RT0252<br />

Specific attenti<strong>on</strong> must be given to the examinati<strong>on</strong> of the following:<br />

a) <strong>Track</strong> cables and jumper cables, their c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rail and clearance<br />

when passing under other rails.<br />

b) Fishplate type b<strong>on</strong>ding, including tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding where provided.<br />

c) Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s where provided.<br />

d) Metallic and other c<strong>on</strong>ductive debris around insulati<strong>on</strong>s and rails.<br />

e) Point rodding, signal wires etc, touching or liable to touch either rail.<br />

f) Insulati<strong>on</strong> deteriorati<strong>on</strong> and rail burring over insulati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

g) Rust or other rail c<strong>on</strong>taminants <strong>on</strong> the surface of the rails.<br />

The relay voltage should be checked and compared with the entries <strong>on</strong> the<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Record Card. If the value is significantly different from previously<br />

recorded values under similar weather c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, a full test should be<br />

c<strong>on</strong>ducted.<br />

The commissi<strong>on</strong>ing drop shunt test is always carried out with the shunt box<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails at the relay end of the track circuit.<br />

However, for routine drop shunt tests <strong>on</strong> d.c. or a.c. power frequency (50Hz -<br />

831 / 3Hz) track circuits (other than auto–coupled impedance b<strong>on</strong>d types), the<br />

R A I L T R A C K H1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page H2 of 2<br />

4 Full Test<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

shunt box may be c<strong>on</strong>nected across the track circuit relay links in the lineside<br />

apparatus housing. The value of drop shunt obtained at the lineside apparatus<br />

housing will usually be higher than that obtained at the rails, the resistance of the<br />

relay end track leads being the most significant factor.<br />

It is <strong>on</strong>ly permissible to undertake drop shunt tests at the track circuit relay links<br />

in the lineside apparatus housing. where comparative shunts have previously<br />

been carried out both at the rails and at the lineside apparatus housing, and the<br />

two values are endorsed <strong>on</strong> the record card. It is then possible to judge any<br />

value obtained at the lineside apparatus housing relative to its theoretical<br />

railequivalent. Where such a theoretical value can be seen to approach the<br />

minimum acceptable, the test should be verified at the rails.<br />

The procedure for carrying out a drop shunt test is detailed in Part F 3.2.<br />

A variati<strong>on</strong> in the drop shunt value may be caused by variati<strong>on</strong>s in equipment<br />

performance, or by expected variati<strong>on</strong>s in envir<strong>on</strong>mental c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, with the<br />

drop shunt reaching the upper end of its range in wet weather and the lower end<br />

in dry weather.<br />

If the drop shunt exceeds the maximum value for the track circuit (see the<br />

relevant Code of Practice ), it is likely that the track circuit is being shunted by<br />

poor ballast or debris. The track circuit should be examined for these faults. If it<br />

appears to be in good physical c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>, the track circuit equipment should be<br />

regarded as failed and the cause of the failure investigated through the fault<br />

finding procedure (see the relevant Code of Practice).<br />

If the drop shunt is lower than the minimum value for the track circuit (see the<br />

relevant Code of Practice), there has been an unexpected equipment failure.<br />

The Engineering Supervisor is to be informed, and immediate investigati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

undertaken to ascertain the cause of the low drop shunt value.<br />

The full test must be applied whenever alterati<strong>on</strong>s are made (eg. relaying,<br />

lead/jumper renewal, equipment replacement, adjustment, etc). The full test<br />

comprises the following:<br />

a) Carry out a Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) At the feed end, measure and record the voltages, currents and other<br />

parameters as required <strong>on</strong> the fr<strong>on</strong>t of the record card. Any adjustments<br />

required must be in accordance with the relevant secti<strong>on</strong> of this handbook for<br />

the type of track circuit under test.<br />

c) At the relay end, with the track circuit clear, measure and record the<br />

voltages, currents and other parameters required and enter <strong>on</strong> the fr<strong>on</strong>t of<br />

the record card.<br />

d) Perform a drop shunt test with the shunt box across the rails at the relay end<br />

and enter details <strong>on</strong> the record card. Where the track circuit is of a type able<br />

to be routine shunted at the relay links in the lineside apparatus housing,<br />

perform a sec<strong>on</strong>d drop shunt test at this positi<strong>on</strong> and endorse the record<br />

card with that value.<br />

e) Set the shunt box to the minimum for that track circuit and c<strong>on</strong>nect across<br />

the rails at all extremities of the track circuit, c<strong>on</strong>firming that the track circuit<br />

occupies <strong>on</strong> each occasi<strong>on</strong>. This test must obtain simultaneous track circuit<br />

occupati<strong>on</strong> where an overlapping secti<strong>on</strong> exists.<br />

H2 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Categories of Failure<br />

3 Intermittent Failures<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part J<br />

Fault Finding<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J1 of 5<br />

This Part gives a general outline to faults comm<strong>on</strong> to all types of track circuits;<br />

faults caused by electric tracti<strong>on</strong> systems or peculiar to a particular track circuit<br />

design are given in the appropriate Code of Practice of the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Handbook.<br />

When clearing a fault, details of all readings and results should be noted, to<br />

establish a logical pattern of testing and adjustment. The track circuit record<br />

card(s) should always be investigated, as deteriorating readings during<br />

maintenance can show the impending failure of a comp<strong>on</strong>ent.<br />

When a fault has been located, the relevant tests carried out up to that point<br />

should be repeated, as, in the case of multiple simultaneous faults, <strong>on</strong>e fault can<br />

mask another.<br />

Once a fault has been cleared, the track circuit must be fully tested prior to<br />

restorati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit failures fall into the following categories:<br />

Right Side: Indicati<strong>on</strong> shows occupied with no train in the<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Protected Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side: Indicati<strong>on</strong> shows clear when a train is in the secti<strong>on</strong>,<br />

but is caused by a failure of the indicati<strong>on</strong> system<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly; the train is still protected by the interlocking.<br />

Unprotected Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side: <strong>Track</strong> circuit or repeat relay fails to de–energise<br />

when a train is in the secti<strong>on</strong>; the train is no l<strong>on</strong>ger<br />

protected by the interlocking.<br />

The nature of the failure can be further categorised:<br />

Permanent: Failure remains static.<br />

Intermittent: Failure is <strong>on</strong>ly apparent for short periods.<br />

Intermittent faults are often the most difficult to solve, as the failure does not<br />

usually remain static l<strong>on</strong>g enough to take all necessary readings and<br />

observati<strong>on</strong>s. The following are possible causes dependent <strong>on</strong> circumstances:<br />

Vibrati<strong>on</strong> Vibrati<strong>on</strong> caused by the passage of trains can create<br />

intermittent high resistance in b<strong>on</strong>ding or intermittent<br />

short circuits between the rails (ie. the failure may<br />

remain after <strong>on</strong>e train but be cleared by a<br />

subsequent <strong>on</strong>e). Trains, or operati<strong>on</strong> of other<br />

equipment such as point machines, should be<br />

observed <strong>on</strong> site or <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s diagram; If<br />

the failure always occurs with a train at a particular<br />

point or coincides with operati<strong>on</strong> of other equipment,<br />

that geographic site should be fully investigated.<br />

R A I L T R A C K J1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J2 of 5<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Interference This is usually associated with d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> railways<br />

and arises because of the high currents necessary<br />

with the low supply voltage. If a failure occurs with<br />

trains in certain positi<strong>on</strong>s or during times of heavy<br />

traffic, the tracti<strong>on</strong> return system should be<br />

investigated.<br />

Earth Faults Due to track circuits being very “earthy”, especially<br />

during wet weather, trains at certain positi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong><br />

other lines may affect the rail to rail voltage of a track<br />

circuit, causing intermittent failures. An earth fault is<br />

usually noticed with a sec<strong>on</strong>d fault caused by a<br />

defective c<strong>on</strong>tinuity b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Broken Rails/B<strong>on</strong>ds These can cause intermittent c<strong>on</strong>tinuity problems.<br />

4 Right Side Failures When called to a fault, it is first necessary to determine whether the cause lies in<br />

the track circuit itself or its associated repeater circuits. This can be resolved by<br />

proceeding directly to the relay end and examining the track relay (having<br />

c<strong>on</strong>firmed that the track is supposed to be clear !). This secti<strong>on</strong> is c<strong>on</strong>cerned<br />

with fault locati<strong>on</strong> in the track circuit itself.<br />

4.1 Types of Fault<br />

Since the various track circuits used have differing types of feed units, ranging<br />

from a single d.c. cell to complex transmitters, the methods for checking these<br />

different feed units are described in the relevant Code of Practice within the<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook.<br />

If the transmitter or feed is found to be functi<strong>on</strong>ing correctly, it can then be used<br />

to determine the general nature of the fault (ie. short circuit or disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>).<br />

This can be d<strong>on</strong>e by taking voltage and current measurements at the feed end<br />

as shown in Figure J1 .<br />

Figure J1<br />

Remove Link For Current Measurement<br />

J2 R A I L T R A C K<br />

A<br />

V<br />

Feed


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

A disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> in the series b<strong>on</strong>ding will:<br />

a) Reduce the current being fed into the track circuit.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J3 of 5<br />

b) Reduce the voltage normally dropped across the feed impedance.<br />

c) Increase the rail voltage at the feed end.<br />

A short circuit will:<br />

a) Increase the current fed into the track circuit.<br />

b) Increase the voltage dropped across the feed impedance.<br />

c) Reduce the rail voltage at the feed end.<br />

4.2 Locating a Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

The higher rail voltage can be measured at all positi<strong>on</strong>s al<strong>on</strong>g the track circuit<br />

from the feed end up to the point of disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. On the relay side of the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> the rail voltage will be very low. Fault locati<strong>on</strong> therefore entails<br />

walking through and checking the rail voltage to identify the positi<strong>on</strong> of the step<br />

change in value. The faulty b<strong>on</strong>d etc, can be c<strong>on</strong>firmed by measuring a voltage<br />

across it.<br />

4.3 Locating a Short Circuit<br />

4.3.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

The extent of the change in feed end voltages and currents will depend up<strong>on</strong> the<br />

type of track circuit and the physical positi<strong>on</strong> of the fault al<strong>on</strong>g the length of the<br />

track circuit. C<strong>on</strong>sult the relevant secti<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>cerned with the specific type of<br />

track circuit, as appropriate. The general positi<strong>on</strong> is as follows:<br />

a) At d.c. and power frequency a.c., the rail impedance is negligible, and the<br />

resulting electrical circuit is c<strong>on</strong>stant, wherever the short circuit is located<br />

within the track circuit. Thus, any voltage across the rails, permitted by an<br />

imperfect short circuit, will be c<strong>on</strong>stant throughout the length, giving no clue<br />

as to its physical positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) With audio frequencies and impulses, the rails have significant impedance,<br />

and the effect of a short circuit will vary depending up<strong>on</strong> its physical positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The closer it is to the feed end, the more it will increase the feed current and<br />

decrease the rail voltage.<br />

In either case, it is not possible to precisely locate the short circuit by simple<br />

observati<strong>on</strong> of rail voltage al<strong>on</strong>g the track circuit. Other methods available are<br />

as follows:<br />

4.3.2 Visual Inspecti<strong>on</strong> and Provocati<strong>on</strong><br />

This is particularly useful where track circuit equipment is not resp<strong>on</strong>sible.<br />

Examples of such a fault include signal wire or point rods touching the rails, and<br />

faulty insulati<strong>on</strong> in point c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s etc.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>nect a meter across the rails and observe its reacti<strong>on</strong> when the item of<br />

equipment is provoked (eg. waggle the signal wire or stand <strong>on</strong> the rods, having<br />

first ensured that they will not be operated). In the case of faulty insulati<strong>on</strong>s, a<br />

hammer blow to the metalwork adjacent to the insulati<strong>on</strong> will often produce sharp<br />

changes of rail voltage. Alternatively, the insulati<strong>on</strong> should be carefully<br />

dismantled and reassembled.<br />

R A I L T R A C K J3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J4 of 5<br />

5 Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side Failures<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4.3.3 Use of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector<br />

The track circuit fault detector comprises a test signal transmitter and a receiver,<br />

both units being self c<strong>on</strong>tained with their own battery power supply. The<br />

detector is designed to be used <strong>on</strong> a track circuit whose feed has been<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected and replaced by the test transmitter. However, with audio<br />

frequency track circuits, the transmitter may not be required, as the receiver will<br />

detect the steady t<strong>on</strong>e of the feed frequency.<br />

A full descripti<strong>on</strong> and details of operati<strong>on</strong> are given in Part F.<br />

4.3.4 Subdivisi<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

This technique is particularly useful for track circuits in S & C where the secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

of the track circuit are pieced together with jumper cables. It can be applied in<br />

other situati<strong>on</strong>s by removal of fishplates and associated b<strong>on</strong>ds in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

with the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

Note: This technique must not be applied to a tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail or jumper<br />

unless the work is under the direct c<strong>on</strong>trol of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Engineer.<br />

Where the feed end test indicates a short circuit and a jumper part of the way<br />

through the track circuit is subsequently disc<strong>on</strong>nected, the effect <strong>on</strong> the feed end<br />

will provide clues as to the locati<strong>on</strong> of the short circuit. If the short circuit lies<br />

between the feed and the disc<strong>on</strong>nected jumper, the feed current and rail voltage<br />

will be largely unaffected. However, if the short circuit is between the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected jumper and the relay end, the feed end test will now indicate the<br />

symptoms of a disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

4.3.5 Faulty C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleeper Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Rails <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers are usually insulated from the chair fastenings; the<br />

rail sits <strong>on</strong> a pad whilst clips (eg. Pandrol clips) bear <strong>on</strong> a plastic insulati<strong>on</strong> piece<br />

against the foot of the rail. It is unusual for individual faulty rail insulati<strong>on</strong>s to fail<br />

a track circuit. Rather, a number of such failures may c<strong>on</strong>tribute to a general<br />

deteriorati<strong>on</strong> of ballast resistance.<br />

For the specific investigati<strong>on</strong> of faulty rail insulati<strong>on</strong>s, a special test unit; the Rail<br />

Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester, is available. For the applicable descripti<strong>on</strong> and operating<br />

instructi<strong>on</strong>s see Part G.<br />

4.3.6 Failure of Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Care must be taken when attempting to check the insulati<strong>on</strong> resistance of IRJs<br />

in situ due to the parallel path provided by the ballast <strong>on</strong> either side of the joint.<br />

Methods of testing IRJs are given in Part G.<br />

5.1 Rail Surface<br />

Permanent or intermittent wr<strong>on</strong>g side failures involving loss of train shunt can<br />

occur because of a poor rail surface due to rust, leaf debris, oil film, or crushed<br />

coal/sand/ballast. The surface c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> should be visually checked throughout<br />

the track circuit and suitably cleared if possible.<br />

At locati<strong>on</strong>s where oil film or rust is excessive and speeds are less than 5 mph<br />

(eg. locomotive depots, terminal stati<strong>on</strong>s), a stainless steel “zig–zag” strip can be<br />

applied to the surface of the running rail by the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

J4 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J5 of 5<br />

5.2 Faulty <strong>Track</strong> Relay<br />

It is possible that a track relay may be mechanically damaged in some way which<br />

prevents it properly de–energising. A check should be made to see that the<br />

relay operates correctly when a shunt is applied.<br />

5.3 Extraneous Interference<br />

It is possible that the track circuit is receiving energy from other than its own feed<br />

unit. Disc<strong>on</strong>nect the feed and c<strong>on</strong>firm that the relay voltage is less than 30% of<br />

its drop–away value.<br />

5.4 Gaps In <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

This is a problem arising particularly <strong>on</strong> electric tracti<strong>on</strong> railways due to the need<br />

to provide parallel alternative paths for tracti<strong>on</strong> return current in the rails, but can<br />

arise in any situati<strong>on</strong> where the b<strong>on</strong>ding is not in series. It can be seen from<br />

Figure J2 that defective b<strong>on</strong>ding in the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail can lead to a wr<strong>on</strong>g<br />

side failure; a train between the two disc<strong>on</strong>nected b<strong>on</strong>ds would not shunt the<br />

track circuit current. Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding is now provided to prevent such<br />

occurrences. Where parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding exists, it must be inspected and short<br />

circuits applied to c<strong>on</strong>firm correct detecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Figure J2<br />

Two Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

R A I L T R A C K J5


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

References<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page Ref1 of 2<br />

(Railway Group Standards references correct as at Catalogue 13)<br />

Railway Standards<br />

GK/RC0741 Signalling Maintenance Specificati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

GK/RH0751 Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook<br />

GK/RC0755 D.C. <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RC0756 HVI <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RC0757 50Hz. <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RH0730 Signalling Testing Handbook<br />

GK/RH0740 Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook<br />

GK/RT0004 Symbols for use <strong>on</strong> Signalling Plans and Sketches<br />

GK/RT0009 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of Signalling Related Equipment<br />

GK/RT0011 Train Detecti<strong>on</strong><br />

GK/RT0031 Lineside Signals and Indicators<br />

GK/RT0201 Signalling Design Producti<strong>on</strong><br />

GK/RT0251 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

GK/RT0252 Reinforcement of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B<strong>on</strong>ding (Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

GM/TT0126 Producti<strong>on</strong> and Modificati<strong>on</strong>s of B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans and the<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> all Electrified Lines except the<br />

SE, SC & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0127 Inspecti<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> all Electrified Lines except the SC, SE<br />

& SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0128 Maintenance and Inspecti<strong>on</strong> of Negative B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> the SC,<br />

SE & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0129 Producti<strong>on</strong> of Drawings for and the Installati<strong>on</strong> of Negative<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> the SC, SE & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

RT3170 <strong>Track</strong> Safety Handbook<br />

G0/RT3091 D.C. Electrified Line Instructi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

GS/ES0872 Railway Signaling Cable<br />

BR863 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds for use with <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

SSP 62 Replacement of Colour Light Signals to Danger<br />

BRS-SE 33 Channel Pin for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Rail B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

BRS-SM 104/11 Stake (Angle) for <strong>Track</strong> Side Equipment (1070)<br />

BRS-SM 104/13 Stake (Angle) for <strong>Track</strong> Side Equipment (760)<br />

RAILTRACK Ref1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page Ref2 of 2<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Standards (c<strong>on</strong>tinued)<br />

BRS-SM 318 Facing Point Layouts Left and Right Hand Drives<br />

BRS-SM 319 Single and Double Slip Layout Right Hand Drive<br />

BRS-SM 320 Single and Double Slip Layout Left Hand Drive<br />

BRS-SM 374 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Assembly<br />

BRS-SM 375 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Body Unit<br />

BRS-SM 376 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 411 Taper Pin for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 622 C<strong>on</strong>crete Bearer Layout, S&T Equipment<br />

BRS-SM 848 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Cables Plate for Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

BRS-SM 849 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Cables Flange Clip/Cable Clip for Cable<br />

Terminati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 2200 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Facing Point Layout Single Acting<br />

Cylinders & Cast Body<br />

BRS-SM 2228 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Double Slip Points Layout Single<br />

Acting Cyl - Cast Body - A6 Mods<br />

BRS-SM 2240 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Switch Diam<strong>on</strong>d Layouts<br />

BRS-SM 2244 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Point Layout with Hydraulic<br />

Actuators Tandem Turnout in 113FBV Rail for Cast Body<br />

Single Acting Cylinder<br />

BRS-SM 2260 Rail Clamp Point Lock Facing Point Layout for UIC-541113A<br />

Plain Lead Switches<br />

MD82017 Flat Bottom Rail Soleplate for Use with F.P.L.<br />

Ref2 RAILTRACK

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!